Home

1715-UM001 - Rockwell Automation

1. j r 5 ey i O 46 mm ossis o esses o 501000000 i FENE I 1 81 in mea Err SISIISIOO ISSISS SS S v Dee 101 mm m En e A y 8 a 8 3 98 in an 3 18 ots fg 233mm d EE E 9 17 in 3 H cremeiot e e e MeH enemas cx HANI Ethemet2 Ethemet2 Channelo7 amp e e e ate aE B S e D D 8 3 3 fe o e e 8 3 H mac e saz 9 9 E e e 6 g J o o Each Base Unit Two Shown Occupies 32058M 126 mm 4 96 in Width Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 69 Chapter2 Installation Instructions DIN Rail Assembly 70 166mm 6 54in The 1715 Redundant I O System is mounted on DIN rails within an enclosure Pay special attention to dimensions needed for base unit placement For each pair of DIN rails mount the lower rail with its center line 101 mm 3 98 in below the center line of the upper rail Free space must also be provided on each end of the DIN rail for the end stops if necessary Component Size and Weights Table 6 Component Sizes Item Size HxWxD Adapter base unit 224 x 84 x 30 m
2. Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 19 Chapter1 Redundancy System Overview Layout the Hardware This section discusses how to lay out the hardware for the system by topology System Context The redundant I O subsystem must be connected to one ControlLogix redundancy system or any Logix system that supports I O via the EtherNet IP network The topologies that the 1756 EN2T or 1756 EN2TR modules support DLR Ring or Star establish all connections via the Ethernet network For more information about DLR topologies see the EtherNet IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide publication ENET AP005 Figure 2 1715 Redundant 1 0 System DLR Ring Topology Attached to a 1756 ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System 1756 ControlLogix 1756 ControlLogix Primary Chassis Secondary Chassis NE SM T af af o o o o r I oOo 1756 EN2TR 1756 RM2 1756 EN2TR 1756 RM2 iocos
3. i 8 er A Z Z TATOO WW e S I SISI SiiS TS D T 1 1 D 1 Ww wy wy Ww wy MI 2M M S N N N N N N C J J js J J C J C J 2 45242 1715 Redundant 1 0 System 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 Figure 3 1715 Redundant 1 0 System Star Topology Attached to a 1756 ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System 1756 ControlLogix 1756 ControlLogix Primary Chassis Secondary Chassis 1756 RM Cable E B BE Do Je BG rf T ta 518 BTS Q amp um 9 e JIE E 4 E E i gt Ethernet Switch TEE en a SL REDE SES eee Te IE TS I em ep Sm app I V P EE Zuislsgigel9glsggsg cesi TA im 3 P TR ES el RI mI mS mg ml mM N N fil an i
4. Haa EE zs t TE Junt zren aided mmmL Module Status Module status Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Healthy Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready 1 Ready Network Status Network Status 8 Run Run Run Run run je run je Rack Status RackStatus Channel oo Channel 00 Channel 00 eee Channel00 le Channel 00 e Channel 01 Channel 01 Channel 1 Channel ot Chamelol Channelor e Channel 02 Channel 02 Channel 02 Ehannel 02 Channel02 Channelo2 amp e Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel 03 Channel3 O Channelo3 e Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel 04 Channel04 e Channelo4 amp e e Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel 05 Channel os Channelos Ethernet 1 Ethernet Channel 06 Channel 06 Channels Channel 06 Channelos e Gand Ethernet 2 Ethemet2 Channel 07 Channel 07 Channelo7 Channel 07 Channelo7 taver e C O at ate at at PIC atem Channel 08 Channel 08 Chamelos Channeios Channel 09 Channel 09 cwm cw Channel 10 Channel 10 Channel10 Channet1o0 Channel 11 Channel 11 Cmn Came Channel 12 Channel 12 Channel12 Channel12 Channel 13 Channel 13 IH Channel 13 e Channel 13 e Channel 14 Channel 14 Channel 14 Camera Channel 15 Channel 15 Hannes ie Channel 15 e Er A c TE LAS EE lt 32065 M 2 3 an TIP T
5. W 10 356 Lo 3 98 Q 36cL 0 3LLE 55 6 OE 66 0E 66 19 L6 967 6 10 368 039 Lowy zoaese zov 8033 91 60 3201 60 320 L 603 99 80 3ZE E 10301 10 398 10 3881 zoaze 10 398 6 Lv L6L SES E lez ses e S802296 GL ovv s EE S 233 8 Es S sas2 sESZ wndosq 5 958 28988 228288 X988 253e uoisiag z z z eremuun S S S ci ci sauas lt lt lt lt lt AE g A8 a oy 5 amp EB RE 8 ES Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 302 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Appendix D The PFD calculations in Table 70 are calculated for a 2 year proof test interval 17 520 hours and are specific to1715 I O components in ControlLogix systems De energize to trip 2 year Proof Test Interval Table 70 De energize to trip 2 year Proof Test Interval MTTR 24 Hours PTI 2 0 Years Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration z o S w m Src a 2 23 s s is s 3 e ES 8 lz e lg E le zz le B EE 2 E le 2 Esja E a gt a a GB ca a 2 D IJa a a 1715 A 2 001 Ethernet 2s a AENTR adapter e 5 a m g i a 5 2 T E 7 a j aa dg Ja Ja 3 3 s ls lz s 8 e 3 ls J 8 module E os E pe gt BE s x 2 cd 1715 A 2 001 16 IB16D channel di g js Je s e amp 2 5 2 e 5 3 input a 29 Je
6. YLS 803 04 60 3981 60 3981 603cCl 60 395 Wy azoo azoo azoo 2001 2001 addd 90 3251 10 3999 10 3888 03008 90 3889 aHdd 60390s Ol Xcc8 oars 603 9 60 38 f E LH L L L L L ww E amp E 20 906 L LO 36L 7 10 36 C C0436rl 0356 9 03087 l0 369 10 3696 c0 36L7 zo azg s pd 9601 9650 9660 0 L 9660 d 9801 9601 Uls Lo wly 203 C8 s S add 50 3762 v0 300 E aHdd 60 3698 8039 11H v 2 WN LOFIPL L L0 3pUL CO436LC 7043 85 dds S5 E6 960 66 960 66 9619 6 96ttr 6 2 PPY 10 368v L03vPl LO APH L 203 LO ALL Y a npy 803 91 60 3001 60 3001 603698 80 XCE E s 403 01 103981 203881 LO ATL 10 395 381W EL6 LY8 L6L SES E L6Z SES E S80 LL9 6 oLl opy 3 9EIEFEBEEFHIE 8 g uondisg E S 88 8 L E ES a uoi 5 s s s E ewmuug al al E E c SaaS lt lt lt lt lt AE as Do AG a y 5E RS EE ES ES Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 298 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Appendix D The PFD calculations in Table 65 are calculated for a 5 year proof test interval 43 800 hours and are specific to1715 I O components in ControlLogix systems Table 65 5 year PFD Calculations for 1715 1 0 Components Cat No 1715 AENTR Firmware Version Simplex Configurat
7. Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 32066 M Chapter 2 67 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Install Summary 68 The 1715 Redundant I O System is a modular system The adapter and I O base units snap together by using mating connectors and retaining clips to form the backplane The base units provide the interconnections for power adapter and I O data Once connected the base units form one mechanical assembly or backplane IMPORTANT Theinsertion and removal of modules does not disturb the electrical connections with field devices Step 1 Enclosure DIN Rail Assembly The 1715 Redundant I O System is assembled on DIN rails within an enclosure After deciding on an enclosure install the DIN rails before building your system Step 2 Build the System After assembling the DIN rail enclosure follow these steps in this order to build your redundant I O system 1 Mount a 24V user supplied power supply See the instructions that came with the power supply Mount the adapter base unit onto the DIN rails Mount the I O base units onto the DIN rails Insert retaining clips to connect adapter and I O base units Install anchor end stops onto the DIN rails Mount termination assemblies to the base units Mount I O expansion cable if needed o d O wo Bow M Wire the adapter base e Connect to power e Wire the ground e Connect to field wiring 9 Conne
8. These changes will cause module data types and properties to change Data will be set to default values unless it can be recovered from the existing module properties Verify module properties before Applying changes Yes No 7 Click Yes Change module definition A new General tab appears in Simplex mode Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 193 Chapter 5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Notice there is now only one slot number that is displayed and Redundant now is No 1715 IB16D 16 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Input Allen Bradley AENTR b16d Module Definition Rein 21 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Redundant No SIL2 Safety No 8 Click the Connection tab see page 177 9 Click the Module Info tab see page 178 10 Click the Configuration tab see page 191 11 Click OK The I O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this 5 83 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fa 0 1756 L61 Redundant IO System i 1 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr Eley Ethernet g 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module 1715Redundant g 0 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module f 2 1715 IB16D A Digital_Input_Module_Redundant 9 4 1715 IB16D A Digital Input Module Simplex g 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr Add a1715 OB8DE Digital In this section you do the following
9. MainTask tz C MainProgram Unscheduled Programs Phases 3 6 Motion Groups E Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions amp Data Types Cj User Defined Ep Strings Gi Add On Defined E Predefined Cj Module Defined Trends 5 6 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 p s 0 1756 L61 Redundant _I0 Controller Organizer Step 2 Configure the Controller in the RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer Project 1 To configure the controller in the Controller Organizer from the I O Configuration folder right click the new controller that you created and choose Properties 3 6 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fa 0 61 Redundant_IO 8 New Module du Cut Ctrl X Ba Copy Ctrl C KA Paste Ctrl Delete Del Cross Reference Ctri E Properties Alt Enter t Print b Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 169 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System The Controller Properties dialog box appears f Controller Properties Redundant IO System ioj xl Advanced SFC Execution File Redundancy Nonvolatile Memory Memory General Serial Port System Protocol User Protocol Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Vendor Allen Bradley Type 1756 L61 ControlLogix5561 Controller Change Controller Revision 19 1 Name Redundant ID System Descrip
10. N Polarizing Pins SN L Pins vI S8 Q CD Q eN LONI o 112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Analog Output Slew Tolerance Analog output channel voltage slew is unconstrained with the limits set by the compliance operating voltage range of the module To avoid spurious declaration of channel faults it is necessary to ensure that the field supply voltage and output signal condition satisfies the maximum slew rate criteria that are defined in the 1715 Redundant I O System Specifications Technical Data publication 1715 T D001 So it can be necessary to condition the field supply voltage or output signal such as by filtering Field Loop Circuit for Analog Outputs The field loop circuit for an analog output is shown in Figure 53 Figure 53 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module Recommended Field Loop Circuit Field Power Circuit System 24V DC Analog Output Module TM aa Load Termination Assembly 32109M OV Field Power Circuit for Analog Outputs An alternative method is shown in Figure 54 The figure shows when the field power is used to supply the load Figure 54 Field Power Circuit for Analog Outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 113 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Field 24V DC e l Load ei Analog Output Module 0o Termination Assembly OV 114 Rockwell Auto
11. Bit 0 PortA1FullDuplex 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 2 PortA2Duplex 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 3 PortB1Duplex 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 4 PortB2Duplex 0 Inactive 1 Active Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto negotiation status Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Adapter fault bit 0 when at least one adapter is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no adapters 309 AppendixF 1 0 Tag Definitions Table 74 Input Tag Name Data Type Definition Value Description 0 Auto negotiation in progress 1 Auto negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed by using a default value for speed and duplex 2 Auto negotiation of duplex but detected speed by using a default value for duplex 3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed 4 Auto negotiation not attempted by using forced speed and duplex values 5 255 Undefined PortA2ANStatus SINT enumerated Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto negotiation status Value Description 0 Auto negotiation in progress 1 Auto negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed by using a default value for speed and duplex 2 Auto negotiation of duplex but detected speed by using a default value for duplex 3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed 4 Auto negotiation not attempted by using forced speed and duplex values 5 255 Undefined PortB1ANStatus SINT enumerated Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto negotiation status Value De
12. Power Combiner 1715 0B8DE Digital Output Module Functional Block Diagram Figure 37 1715 OB8DE Functional Bock Diagram Combined Power Feed PWR Feed Combiner Drives Command A B C 1 0 Command Bus 1 0 Backplang SPI Flash Dual RedundantSYS_24v2 System Power SYS_24V1 SYS OV Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Termination Assembly Response a Data Management Isolated E Backplane amp Output Switch K i Control A Interface VREF Command Output contr La Pwr Power PWR Power Valid Valid Command Output Control Data Management amp Output Switch VMON A Mh po ee Control B Response i Reverse Voltag la Blocking Channel Module ient Status Status ransien VMON B Suppression E Isolated Over Undet PWR VREF i i Power Voltage mM Supply Protection dnd CED Array Terminator ali ssembly T Front Panel Z CH7 32107 M1 See Figure 37 Two independent output switch control units control the field output channel The field output circuitry is galvanically isolated from the processor input commands and response lines by an isolated interface circuit This architecture helps protect the system processors from faults in the output control circuits of the module and possible field dev
13. State Steady off Steady green Description No power There is no power to the module Module operational The module has been configured without any faults Flashing green Standby The module has not been configured Steady red Flashing green red Major fault The module has detected a nonrecoverable fault Self test The module is performing its power on self tests Flashing amber Unlocked Adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state Redundancy Status Steady off Steady green No power unlocked or no partner The module is not locked via the locking screw or no partner module is present Synchronized The module is synchronized with the partner module redundant operation Flashing green Partner detected synchronizing The partner module has been detected and is synchronizing with its partner module in preparation for redundant operation Steady red Flashing green red Synchronization fault The partner module is present but unable to synchronize no redundant operation Self test The module is performing its power on self tests Flashing amber Unlocked Adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state Network Status Steady off Steady green No power unlocked no IP address The module has no power or the module is not locked via the locking screw or no IP address has been assigned or obtained Connected The mod
14. e Module removal and replacement online and when in Duplex mode no interruption of the signal inputs e Input voltage data is provided for line monitoring and field fault detection Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 1715 0B8DE Digital Output Module The digital output module interface consists of a combination of digital output modules and digital output termination assemblies Each module provides 8 isolated output channels and plugs into one position of the I O base unit and a corresponding termination assembly Digital outputs can be configured as simplex or duplex The 1715 OB8DE digital output module has a flexible fail safe design with eight field output channels The module output can be up to 1A continuous for each channel The 1715 OB8DE digital output module features are as follows Eight isolated output channels per module Fail safe design and operation Suitable for simplex and duplex connections for fault tolerant applications Duplex series output switches with overload protection for each channel Voltage and current monitoring on each channel with reverse current protection Short circuit and open circuit line fault detection Dual redundant field power feed capabilities without the need for external diodes When fitted in duplex configuration modules can be replaced online without system interruption otherwise personal injury or death or
15. 12 Click OK The I O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this amp 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fs 0 1756 L61 Redundant IO System i 1 1756 EN2TR CLX_Ethernet_module_en2tr xk Ethernet g 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module 1715Redundant 9 0 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module g 2 1715 IB16D A Digital Input Module Duplex 9 4 1715 IB16D 4 Digital Input Module Simplex g 5 1715 OB8DE A Digital Output Module Duplex a 7 1715 OB8DE A Digital Output Module Simplex f 8 1715 IF16 A Analog Input Duplex 10 1715 IF16 A Analog Input Simplex g 11 1715 OF8I A Analog Output Duplex 13 1715 OF8I A Analog Output Simplex 8 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Chapter 6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Topic Page SIL 2 Safety Application Requirements 212 1715 1 0 Modules in SIL 2 Safety Applications 212 Typical Configurations 214 Requirements for Using 1715 1 0 Modules 217 Using the 1715 Adapter in SIL 2 Applications 218 Using 1715 1 0 Modules in SIL 2 Applications 219 Considerations for Sensor and Actuator Configurations 223 Configure SIL 2 Operation 223 Check SIL 2 Reset Status 228 View Module Information 228 Additional ResourcesConfiguring the Output Module Program Fault Actions 232 This chapter provi
16. The shutdown state defaults to turn off de energize Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Before You Begin Chapter 5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Topic Page Install the Software 164 Install the Add on Profiles 164 Create the Project in RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer 167 Add the 1715 AENTR Adapter to the 1 0 Configuration Tree 173 Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module to the Project 186 Add a1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module to the Project 194 Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module to the Project 200 Add a 1715 0F8I Analog Output Module to the Project 204 Now that the hardware portion of the system is installed you can configure your 1715 Redundant I O System by using the software applications that you installed from your CD See System Software on page 64 Before you begin configuring the 1715 AENTR modules in the redundant chassis verify that these tasks have been completed e Make sure that RSLogix 5000 programming software version 19 or later or Studio 5000 environment version 21 or later is installed e Make sure that the drivers are installed by using RSLinx Classic software version 2 57 or later e Make sure that the firmware is at the latest revision and the software is at the latest version e Make sure that both Add on Profiles are installed on your system One for the 1715 adapter One for the 1715 I O modules Rockwell Automation Pu
17. 1715 TADOFS8I Analog output duplex termination assembly 260 9 17 1715 N2S Short blank slot filler 40 1 41 1715 N2T Tall blank slot filler 50 1 76 Power supply 1 All weights are approximate 72 User supplied Varies Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Install the Power Supply Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Power supplies must be installed to the left of the adapter base unit in a position where the 24V DC supply wiring can be kept reasonably short Figure 25 shows an example of a mounted power supply to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the following e Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV or Protected Extra Low Voltage PELV ATTENTION To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD all connections Figure 25 Power Supply Power Supply 32070 M The 1715 Redundant I O System requires 24V DC power with a toleranc
18. Add a 1715 OF8I Analog In this section you do the following Output Module to the Project e Adda 1715 OF8I analog output module in Duplex mode to the project e Adda 1715 OFS8I analog output module in Simplex mode to the project 204 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Step 1 Add a 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module in Duplex Mode 1 Add the new module see page 186 The Select New Module dialog box appears E Analog 1715 IF16 16 Channel Current Analog Input Allen Bradley ge 1715 OF8I 8 Channel Current Analog Output Isolated Allen Bradley H Digital 2 Expand the Analog module list select the 1715 OF8I module and click OK The General tab appears 3 Module Properties AENTRA2 1715 OF8121 Le Je fs Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Limits Fauit Program Action 1715 OF8I 8 Channel Current Analog Output Isolated Allen Bradley AENTR See page 188 3 Click Change Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 205 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Verify that Redundant is Yes See page 201 Click OK Click the Connection tab see page 177 Click the Module Info A tab see page 178 Click the Module Info B tab see page 178 v 0 NAN Click the Configuration tab The Configuration
19. Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Table 34 Module Definition Parameters for Analog Input Module Parameters Description Data Format Display Only Redundant Yes indicates Duplex mode SIL 2 Safety Choose No if SIL 2 operation is not required Choose Yes to enable SIL 2 operation The safety pull down menu appears only if using Add on Profile version 2 01 007 or later Two new tabs are available for SIL 2 configuration if you choose Yes For information on SIL 2 configuration see Chapter 6 Click OK 5 Click the Connection tab see page 177 6 Click the Module Info A tab see page 178 7 Click the Module Info B tab see page 178 8 Click the Configuration tab The Configuration tab appears Module Properties AENTR4 1715 IF16 2 1 o Es General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Engineering Table 35 Configuration Parameters for the Analog Input Duplex Module Parameters Description Channel Click the channel number to configure parameters for the specified channel 0 15 Current Range Displays the current range 0 20 mA for the channel This field is read only Low Signal Enter the Low Signal value for the channel between 0 0 20 0 mA The default is 4 0 mA This value must be less than the High Signal value Low Signal and Low Engineering values are shown in pairs 202 Rockwell Automation
20. Edition 6 IEC 60079 15 Edition 4 Special Conditions for Safe Use e Models 1715 AENTR the ambient temperature range is 25 60 C 13 140 F e All other models the ambient temperature range is 25 70 C 13 158 F Subject devices are to be installed in an ATEX IECEx Certified IP54 tool accessible enclosure that has been evaluated to the requirements of EN 60079 0 2012 A11 2013 EN 60079 15 2010 and IEC 60079 0 Edition 6 IEC 60079 15 Edition 4 Enclosure is to be marked with the following Warning Do not open when energized After installation of subject devices into the enclosure access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected Grounding conductor should have a minimum cross sectional area of 3 31 mm 12 AWG Subject devices are for use in an area of not more than pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664 1 e Subject devices are to use conductors with a minimum conductor temperature rating of 85 C 185 F e Subject devices are to be installed in the vertical orientation only WARNING N e This equipment shall be mounted in an ATEX certified enclosure with a minimum ingress protection rating of at least IP54 as defined in 1EC60529 and used in an environment of not more than Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 60664 1 when applied in Zone 2 environments The enclosure must have a tool removable cover or door e This equipment shal
21. Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 Ethernet Topology The 1715 Redundant I O System supports DLR Ring and Star Topologies Fora DLR Ring Topology the Ethernet ports of the adapters are configured with the outward facing ports Port 1 of Module A and Port 2 of Module B operating as a 2 port switch Port 2 of Module A and Port 1 of Module B are chained together Figure 9 DLR Ring Ethernet Topology Module B Port 1 Port 2 Ethemet 1 Ethernet 2 TTIITII eee b Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 29 Chapter 1 30 Redundancy System Overview For a STAR Topology the Ethernet ports of the adapters are configured with the leftmost ports Port 1 of Module A and Port lof Module B operating as a 2 port switch The rightmost ports on each adapter are left unused Figure 10 STAR Ethernet Topology 45240 For Ethernet considerations see EcherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems publication ENET UMO0I and ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System publication 1756 UM535 Communication on the EtherNet IP Network Communication to a simplex module is addressed to the slot number for that module CIP communication to modules in a duplex configuration including the adapters is addressed to the lowest slot number for the module pair The adapters respond with CIP errors for attempts to communicate to an I O modul
22. Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Add the 1715 AENTR Adapter Once the project controller and Ethernet module are configured you are ready to the 1 0 Configuration Tree to add the 1715 adapter In this section you do the following e Add the 1715 AENTR adapter to the project e Configure the adapter for the EtherNet IP Network Step 1 Configure the Adapter for the EtherNet IP Network Plan IP addresses by doing the following e You must use two IP addresses e You must know the subnet mask for the Ethernet network the redundant modules are to operate on Options for Setting the IP Addresses of 1715 AENTR Modules You can set the IP address of the redundant AENTR modules in the adapter base by using the following e ABOOTP DHCP utility A BOOTP DHCP utility is provided with the Logix Designer application out of the box See Step 1 Assign an IP Address on the BOOTP DHCP Server on page 125 e Module Configuration properties that are specified in RSLinx Classic software if the modules are already configured e Module Properties dialog box that is accessed by using RSLogix 5000 programming software or the Logix Designer application if the modules are already configured If you are configuring your redundant EtherNet IP modules by using any of the software options that are listed previously see the EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Syste
23. September 2015 89 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Recommended Circuits for Digital Inputs These circuits can be used for simplex and duplex configurations of digital input modules Fit a fuse in each circuit to help protect the field wiring Figure 30 Standard Input 24V DC Termination Assembly I I j I I I l I l l _ Shield if used Terminal Blocks OV 33113M 90 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Figure 31 Line Monitored Inputs 24V DC Terminal Blocks I T I I eo a i I 1 I BEN I I I I j I 1 I l i 1 e Termination ol l i I Assembly D ij EE I y d l I I I 1 Se eee Eee l X d I l l Nw I l l Shield so WA if used i i i I M 32114M OV Threshold Settings for Line Monitored Field Devices For information about setting threshold values see Threshold Values for Digital Inputs on page 267 It is recommended that you do a manual calibration drift check every two years See Calibration Drift Checks on page 279 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 91 Chapter 2 Field Inputs Chan
24. The signature is updated whenever the module configuration is changed You can use this signature to enforce the use of a specific configuration within your application The signature is found in the CRC member of the SIL 2 configuration tag of the module This is the only occasion where you access this tag directly If you want to keep a record of the signature you can click Copy to copy the signature to the Windows clipboard Diagnostic Data While online click Diagnostics on the SIL 2 Safety tab to view data on the SIL 2 Safety Diagnostics dialog box shown in the following figure B SIL2 Safety Diagnostics Counts CRTL Specific Current Data Age CRTL Remaining Maximum Data Age SIL2 Reset Needed Data Message Faults Message Timeouts CRC Errors Source IP Errors Source Slot Errors Destination IP Errors Destination Slot Errors Sequence Errors Good SIL2 Connects Rejected SIL2 Connects 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset Counters Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 IMPORTANT The Reset Counters button on the diagnostics tab resets only the counters that are shown in the 1715 1 0 module profiles It does not reset the counters that are displayed within the ControlLogix Add On Instructions The values retrieved from 1715 output modules populate the diagnostic information Equivalent input module di
25. Value is dimmed including Hard Run mode when the Fault mode is set to Hold Last State Ramp to Fault Value Check the Ramp to Fault Value checkbox to transition the channel from the current value to the fault value when in Fault mode and limited by Ramp Rate The default is cleared Ramp to Fault Value is enabled excluding Hard Run mode when the Fault mode is set to Use Fault Value Ramp to Fault Value is dimmed including Hard Run mode when the Fault mode is set to Hold Last State Program Mode 208 For a channel choose the behavior of the output channel when there is a transition to Program mode Choose between Hold Last State and Use Program Value The default is Hold Last State Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Table 38 Fault Program Action Parameters for Analog Output Duplex Module Parameters Program Value Description Enter a program value between 9999999 99999999 The Program Value must also be in the range of Low Alarm lt Program Value lt High Alarm The default is 0 0 Program Value is enabled excluding Hard Run mode when the Program mode is set to Use Program Value Program Value is dimmed including Hard Run mode when the Program mode is set to Hold Last State Ramp to Program Value Check the Ramp to Program Value checkbox to transition the channel from the current value to the program value when i
26. a safety related system the sensors the actuators and the logic element they can be associated with each component of the logic element that is each module of a programmable controller Probability of failure per hour PFH is typically used to describe safety performance for high demand applications Tables in this chapter present PFD and PFH values for components that TUV evaluates IMPORTANT You are responsible for determining which ofthe values that are provided are appropriate for your SIL 2 certified system Determine which values to use based on the modules that are used in your system and the system configuration Each of the PFD and FPH calculated values that are provided in this manual is based on the configuration that the module can be used in which is 1001 1002 loo2D or 2002 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 293 AppendixD PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Calculations for 1715 1 0 For the calculations presented in this chapter these values were used as the two Modules application dependent variables e Proof test interval T is listed for each table e Mean time to repair MTTR is listed for each section e PFDde Probability of failure on demand for de energize to action systems e PFDe Probability of failure on demand for energize to action systems e SFFde Safe failure fraction for de energize to action systems e SFFe Safe failure fraction for energize to a
27. connecteurs filet s ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit e La substitution de composants peut rendre cet quipement inadapt une utilisation en environnement de Classe Division 2 e S assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de changer les piles Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 45 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Before You Begin This section lists important information that you must consider before starting to build your 1715 Redundant I O System Review the parts list and identify the system components Review the power requirements for the system and for field devices Review design considerations for heating and cooling Specify an enclosure Install the necessary software IMPORTANT Throughout this manual some graphics do not depict the actual hardware as required These graphics are for representational purposes only and do not necessarily reflect the actual component layout of your system Parts List These parts are available to build a 1715 Redundant I O System Their description and catalog part numbers are as follows Table 4 Parts Table Cat No Description 1715 AENTR Adapter 1715 1B16D 16 channel digital input module 1715 0B8DE 8 channel digital output module 1715 IF16 16 channel analog input module 1715 0F8l 8 channel analog output module 1715 A2A 2 slot adapter base unit 1715 A310 3 slo
28. connection 86 requirements 63 System 86 power supply 137 155 de energize to trip 216 install 73 primary IP address 27 probability of failure PFH 293 Probability of Failure on Demand PFD 5 year calculations 295 297 299 calculations 293 294 PFD 293 probability of failure per hour PFH 293 producer 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 programmable electronic systems PES 211 ramp 207 rate 209 to program 209 recommended circuits analog input module 106 digital input module 90 digital output module 97 redundant I 0 system configuration 163 removal and insertion under power RIUP 158 remove module 135 requested packet interval 1715 modules 224 reset 1715 SIL 2 228 SIL 2 253 reset button 265 retaining clips termination assembly 79 RIUP analog module 158 digital module 141 RPI adapter 32 digital module 144 1 0 module 32 setting 144 RSLinx Classic software 128 RSLogix 5000 programming software 116 create new project 167 project 167 RSWho 129 safety application SIL2 14 scaling 160 scaling factor 222 shielded twisted pair cable 115 shutdown mode 220 221 223 shutdown states analog 1 0 module 162 SIL2 211 adapter 176 checklist 307 CIP 16 digital input module 189 reset 253 safety application 14 SIL 2 reset status 228 simplex architecture 22 Index simplex mode analog input module 203 analog output module 209 digital input module 192 digital output m
29. distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation about us sustainability ethics product environmental compliance page Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 United Kingdom Rockwell Automation Ltd Hall Road Maldon Essex CM94LA UK Tel 44 1621 854444 Fax 44 1621 851531 Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Supersedes Publication 1715 UM001C EN P M
30. ec fms General Connection Module Info A Module info B Configuration Limits Fault Program Action Program Moc Communicati Channel Fault Mode Fault Value Program Mode Program Value Failure Output Stat i A Hold last state ixl 0 Program Mode Hold last state Lw 0 0 O Hold last state v 0 0 Program Mode Hold last state Lw 0 0 O Hold last state i 0 0 Program Mode Hold last state 0 0 O Hold last state ixl 0 0 Program Mode Hold last state w 0 0 E Hold last state ixl 0 0 Program Mode Hold last state 0 0 O Hold last state 0 0 Program Mode Hold last state 0 0 O Hold last state ivl 0 0 Program Mode Hold last state 0 0 O Hold last state ix 0 0 Program Mode Li Table 38 Fault Program Action Parameters for Analog Output Duplex Module Parameters Description Channel Click the channel number to configure parameters for the specified channel 0 7 Fault Mode For a channel choose the behavior of the output channel when a communication fault occurs Choose between Hold Last State and Use Fault Value The default is Hold Last State Fault Value Enter a fault value between 9999999 and 99999999 The Fault Value must also be in the range of Low Alarm lt Fault Value lt High Alarm The default is 0 0 Fault Value is enabled excluding Hard Run mode when the Fault mode is set to Use Fault Value Fault
31. x v v Iv nm V Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions 1 Full and custom diagnostics require use of an appropriate end of ine device Table 31 Configuration Parameters for Duplex Mode Parameters Description Point Click the point number to configure parameters for the specified point 0 15 Enable Change of State Check which points trigger production of data on Change of State If the box is checked Change of State is enabled for a particular state transition that by the column header indicates If the box is unchecked Change of State is disabled Enable Change of State appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode 0 15 Diagnostics Choose from the following three pre selected threshold types for each point e Full Thresholds are used that work with the Rockwell Automation preferred end of line devices to support open wire and short circuit protection and diagnostics None Thresholds are used that are appropriate for use with no end of line device This option does not support open wire and short circuit protection and diagnostics Custom You provide the thresholds The default matches the Full thresholds Custom Thresholds Click Edit to display the Edit Custom Thresholds dialog box and edit thresholds for the selected point When offline or online including Hard Run mode the Edit button is enabled when the Custom diagnostics type is selected for a point
32. 0 15 Array of structure Array of 16 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0 15 0 Data 1 Faults Data REAL Input data Faults DINT bit field Channel fault status Bit Name Description 0 Fault 0 Good 1 Circuit fault for this channel 1 ModAFault 0 Good 314 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Table 81 16 channel Analog Input Duplex Input l OTag Definitions Appendix F Tag Name Data Type Definition 1 This channel on Module A is faulted failed 2 ModBFault 0 Good 1 This channel on Module B is faulted failed 3 Underrange 0 Good 1 Underrange detected 4 Overrange 0 Good 1 Overrange detected RollingTimestamp INT Timestamp data Status DINT bit field Bit Name Description 0 ModAFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 1 ModBFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel on module is faulted failed 9 ModAGroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel on Module A is faulted failed 10 ModBGroupFault 0 Good Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1 Any channel on ModuleB is faulted failed 315 AppendixF 1 0 Tag Definitions E 1715 OF8l This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715 OF8I module Table 82 8 channel Analog Output Output Tag Name Data Type Definition AOCh O0 7 Array of structure A
33. 1 and Example 2 are different examples of possible configurations you can have for your system Table 2 Example 1 A Sample System Configuration System Slot Number Base Unit Type Module Position Slot Number by Base Module Designation Unit Type 0 Adapter 0 Adapter A 1 Adapter 1 Adapter B 2 1 0 01 First 1 0 base unit Module A of first duplex pair 3 1 0 02 Module B of first duplex pair 4 1 0 03 Module A of second duplex pair 5 1 0 04 Second 1 0 base unit Module B of second duplex pair 6 1 0 05 First simplex module 7 1 0 06 Module A of third duplex pair 8 1 0 07 Third 1 0 base unit Module B of third duplex pair 9 1 0 08 Second simplex module 10 1 0 09 Third simplex module 11 25 1 0 10 24 Fourth eighth 1 0 base unit Any combination of simplex duplex pair modules 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 Figure 1 Example 2 ASample System Layout _ n EE Module Sam
34. 16 Descriptive Documents The scheduled drawings are listed in the report no provided under item no 8 on page 1 of this Type Examination Certificate 17 Special conditions for safe use Model 1715 AENTR The ambient temperature range is 25 C to 60 C e Allother Models The ambient temperature range is 25 C to 70 C e Subject devices are to be installed in an ATEX Certified IP54 tool accessible enclosure that has been evaluated to the requirements of EN 60079 0 2012 A11 2013and EN60079 15 2010 Enclosure is to be marked with the following Warning Do not open when energized After installation of subject devices into the enclosure access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected Grounding conductor should have a minimum cross sectional area of 3 31 mm e Subject devices are for use in an area of not more than pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664 1 e Subject devices are to use conductors with a minimum conductor temperature rating of 85 C e Subject devices are to be installed in the vertical orientation only 18 Essential Health and Safety Requirements Met by compliance with the standards EN 60079 0 2012 A11 2013 EN 60079 15 2010 00 IC F0060 Issue 9 0 This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change schedule included Page 3of3 38 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 I
35. 1715 TADIB16D TADOB8DE TADOF8 TADIF16 epee HM icy CIC eI RA Eugene mss lt l 2 tl Sills iis EMEMENMEMEME E l we i 1715 A2A 1715 A3IO 1715 A3IO 1715 A3IO Star Topology Figure 61 Simplex Star with a ControlLogix Controller mE mE i lt fe a Actuator JSE EtherNet IP Switch ta a BB GS TH ZEB Seis gae i a ES A S S M E 5 i 46233 LM EJ a E ESS TTN 1715 A2A 1715 A3IO 1715 A3IO L Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 215 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Figure 62 Duplex Star Topology with a ControlLogix Controller EDT ee ee iU es ee L actuator ooo o i ol og ooo fil REI Sensor 4 1756 L72 1756 EN2TR 1756 RM2 1756 L72 1756 EN2TR 1756 RM2 EtherNet IP Switch 1715 1715 1715 1715 TADIB16D TADOB8DE TADOF8 TADIF16 E z l t i K FREE zhao aaa aa E md J N P A 1715 OF8l E 1715 OB8DE e 1715 AENTR 1715 0F8l d U 1715 1F16 Q a n RE 1715 OB8DE 1715 IF16 1715 A2A 1715 A3IO
36. 1715 A3IO 1715 A3IO Internal Diag nostics The 1715 adapters feature internal diagnostics to identify faults that develop during operation and raise appropriate alarm and status indications The diagnostic systems run automatically and check for system faults that are associated with the I O modules and field faults that are associated with field I O circuits The internal diagnostics detect and reveal both safe and dangerous failures In a duplex configuration for example diagnostics can address dangerous failures and therefore the duplex system can be 1002 reverting to lool on the first detected fault and reverting to fail safe when both modules have a fault Power Supplies On de energize to trip two power supplies can be used if fault tolerance is required on the power supplies If only one power supply is used both ofthe power connections must be connected to it system power can be from another power supply to the I O modules 216 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Requirements for Using 1715 1 0 Modules 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 For energize to action dual power supplies are required for both the system and field supplies The system provides the power supply monitoring but this needs to be connected in the application You must follow these requirements when using 1715 I O modules in a SIL 2 application IMPORTANT _Insafety applications channel
37. 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 183 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System The I O Configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this amp 1 0 Configuration 9 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fa 0 1756 L61 Redundant IO System g 1 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr Ethernet H g 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module 9 17 15Redundant g 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr D Obtaining System Status There are two ways to access the status of the primary and secondary adapters e Via the Add on Profile while online with the application e Via the tags in the owner controller Check Adapter Status While Online via the Add on Profile To check the status of the primary and secondary adapters while online follow these steps 1 In the application from the I O Configuration Tree right click the 1715 adapter and choose Properties 1715Redundant 9 0 1715 AENTR A Adapter_Modpl J 2 1715 IB16D A Digital_Input_t J New Module J 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module J 4 1715 IB16D A Digital Input f J 5 1715 OB8DE A Digital Outpu d Cu Ctrl x 7 1715 OB8DE A Digital Outpu Copy Ctrl C i 8 1715 IF16 A Analog Input C E Paste Ctrl J 10 1715 IF16 4 Analog Input J 11 1715 OF 81 4 Analog Outpu Delete Del J 13 1715 OF 81 4 Analog_Outpu fJ 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module ent Cross Reference Ctrl E Properties Print g
38. 2 c ics cee ecsi hin 34 Prevent Electrostatic Dischatge cesse vee s vgce tes e ce REN ep 34 European Hazardous Location Approval suuuuee 35 Multi point Network Communication Connections 44 Pield stdePowekissqusessercdostuau Vedi e dip ead el desi det 44 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP Fuses 44 North American Hazardous Location Approval 45 Before You Begin terer orere tereti e pne vr EV rer tmi eius 46 Parts iskie etc CORE ar aud ad c eC Car ach eee ECCE Ra 46 Required Toolso 2248 sid ese Di ee 47 Spacing ROquiretmbtibssoseu oer d S nei ane ge Ed tof 47 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 5 Table of Contents System Hardware Components 2 44 e eer t Rus 49 1715 AENTR Adapter Redundant Pair eee 50 1715 Digital and Analog I O Modules 00 00 000 51 1715 A2A Adapter Base Uniti pope anes edes Sess Glace ebd 52 IZIS A3IO T O Base Unitic iie reso ERREUR E edis 55 I O Termination Assemblies 523 02 2 0 0 ee os 56 1715 C2 Expansion Cable 5r veter re oret eo ees 62 1715 N2T and 1715 N2S Slot Filler Covers sese 62 lower Requirements eec eek b E RP ever NE IR Eeen PETS 63 Cooling Requirements sine 22 curAe o E RNRRRA ERE Re chs NE yay 63 Heating Requirements si cuoi o or P E XA seed P E ETE 63 Spec ifyan EHCIOBURE sourds zoo re eau baie cognate tbe 64 System Software 2 esee EET ke EE HE EE E EY 64 Module Placements d
39. 90 31 9 90 31 9 S0 3rLv Y0 3 8 1 V 60 4LL L 60 3LUl 60 3 9 8 80 39 vi Simplex Configuration V 10 3 0 v 10 F3 0 v Q HSUL t0 386t SS 6 0E 66 0E 66 L9 L6 Cb E6 10 368 LO 3vir t Lo 3vi t LO JES E LO ALL 7 8073 91 60 3001 60 3001 60 3 9 8 80 3ct PTI 1 0 Years 1073 04 10 3881 10 3881 L0 3CCl 20 499 L6 1v8 L6L SES E L6L SES E 80 9 6 6LV ovy G Ethernet adapter module dual uondipseq 2 S uoissay c aemuy e ec Lr E seus lt lt lt lt lt AE Ag Do As hs vy JES So mu S RS Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 296 PFD and PFH Calculations fora SIL2 System Appendix D The PFD calculations in Table 62 are calculated for a 2 year proof test interval 17 520 hours and are specific to1715 I O components in ControlLogix systems Table 62 2 year PFD Calculations for 1715 1 0 Components Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration Cat No x OQ Description g PFDde PFDe PFDde PFDe A o 1715 AENTR 2 39E 04 3 04E 04 8 96E 07 1 52E 06 1715 IB16D f 16 channel digital input module 7 32E 06 1 12E 05 8 53E 07 8 88E 07 1715 IF16 X 16 channel analog input module 7 32E 06 1 12E 05 8 53E 07 8 88E 07 1715 OB8DE X i 8 channel digital output module 2 80E 06 7 92E 05 5 59E 06 8 00E 07 1715 0F8l 8 channel analog out
40. C 2 J t J C JAC J J C I J 1715 Redundant 1 0 System 45239 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 21 Chapter1 Redundancy System Overview Simplex Architecture Simplex I O modules fail safe on the first detected fault The process under control shuts down when the fault is detected This configuration is suitable for high and low demand module applications Figure 4 Simplex Architecture Input and Output ADAPTER SENSORS FINAL ELEMENTS Digital Output Simplex Termination Assembly Digital Input Simplex Termination Assembly x a e H Lu z 2 U ControlLogix Adapter 1 0 Base Units Base Unit 45241 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 Duplex Architecture An example configuration of dual input modules and adapters and an output module is shown in Figure 5 A redundant input or redundant output module provides fault tolerance for module failures The duplex arrangement can be used for low demand and high demand applications Figure 5 Duplex Architecture Duplex Inputs Simplex Output ADAPTER ADAPTER CIP NETWORK CLX Rockwell Automati
41. Diagnostics If using the 1715 IB16D thresholds you are responsible for designing a circuit that provides unique voltage levels for Wire OFF OFF ON and shorted to 24V DC This typically involves an inline and shunt resistor Typical values for the inline resistor are 3 9 kQ A typical value for the shunt resistor is 15 kQ This generates an OFF voltage of 5V DC and an ON voltage of 14V DC if the supply voltage is 24V DC The digital input module can detect the voltage level much like an analog input module There are no circuit tests on field wiring You define your diagnostic granularity by using custom thresholds that are built in to the channel configuration For full diagnostics you design a circuit for which the OFF state is for example 5V DC and the ON state which is for example 15V DC Wire OFF creates 0V DC which falls below the OFF threshold and OpenWire fault status is set HI A short to 24V DC is above the ON threshold and Short Circuit fault status is sent HI Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Features Specific to 1715 0BD8E Digital Output Modules Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 The features that are described in this section are available on all ControlLogix digital output modules Configurable Point level Output Fault States Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states either On Off or Hold if there is a communication failure or Program mode
42. Displays the enabled state of the port or check to enable the port Link Status Displays the link status of the port as Inactive port is inactive or Active port is active Auto Negotiate Displays the port s auto negotiate status Check Auto Negotiate to enable the module to negotiate the speed and duplex of the port automatically Uncheck Auto Negotiate to set the speed and duplex of the port manually Auto Negotiate appears dimmed and checked when the port and duplex of the module cannot be specified manually Auto Negotiate appears dimmed and unchecked when the module specifies the speed and duplex of the port Speed Selected Displays the selected speed of the port if Auto Negotiate is unchecked Valid speeds are e 10Mbps e 100 Mbps Current Displays the current speed of the port Duplex Selected Displays the selected duplex of the port if Auto Negotiate is unchecked Valid duplexes are Half e Full Current Displays the current duplex of the port 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Table 27 Port Configuration Parameters Parameters Description Port Diagnostics Use the Port Diagnostics tab to view diagnostic information for the port Various communications diagnostic information is available For each physical Ethernet Port this includes link status duplex setting speed and auto negotiation status and CIP diagnostic inform
43. IF16 module and click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 The General tab appears Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration 1715 IF 16 16 Channel Current Analog Input Allen Bradley AENTR Module A Slot ModuleB Slot 5 Module Definition Revision 21 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Input Data Analog Only Data Format Float See Figure on page 188 for detailed parameter information for the General tab 3 Click Change The Module Definition dialog box appears Module Definition E Seres A Revision 2 X 14 Electronic Keying Compatible Module T Connection Data v Input Data Analog Only 1 Data Format Float v1 Redundant Yes v SIL2 Safety No l Table 34 Module Definition Parameters for Analog Input Module Parameters Series Revision Description Choose the Series of the module Choose the Revision of the module For SIL 2 application choose version 3 01 07 or later for 1715 1 0 modules Electronic Keying Choose the Electronic Keying that you wish to use for the selected module See Electronic Keying on page 120 Connection Leave as Data Listen Only is not supported Input Data Display Only Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 201
44. IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters the Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs turns off during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs turn off Follow these steps to enable a fault state 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 1 1756 OA8 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Output State During Program Mode Fault Mode o ort ilo off lon Off zie ort ziloa Off x ott Off v ott Off lot Off v ott Point Communications Failure If communications fail in f Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode f Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel 2 Choose the Fault mode 3 Click OK Output Data Echo During normal operation when a processor sends out an output command to the ControlLogix system the output module that is targeted for that command returns the commanded state of the output to the system This process verifies that the module has received the command and tries to execute it Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 147 Chapter3 Digital 1 0 Operation Table 17 Recommended Fuses Circuit Type DC 1715 OB8DE 2 6 Monitor Fault Bits The Output Data Echo matches only the commanded
45. Input Data my1715adptr 4 l duplicate seq num2 Reconciled Input Data OB8deRECINdata low _seq_num Output Data my171S5adptr 4 0 SourcelP error5 _Raniiactad_O Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 249 Chapter 7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules 8 Createa tag with the appropriate Add On Instruction data type for the Requested Output Data x Name OBBdeREUdata Description a Cancel Help Usage Type Alias For Data Type DB8DE Requested Dutput Dat H Scope fa MyStdProj Enema Read Write he Style Y Constant F Open Configuration 9 Enter the module RPI To optimize system bandwidth type the same RPI value from the module configuration Add On Instruction Scan Times Table 46 Maximum Scan Rates Measured Module Add On Instruction Scan Rate ps max measured 1715 AENTR AENTR_SIL2 Duplex 455 1715 IB16D IB16D Simplex SIL2 Simplex 340 1715 IB16D IB16D Duplex SIL2 Duplex 378 1715 IF16 IF16 Simplex SIL2 Simplex 831 1715 IF16 IF16 Duplex SIL2 Duplex 832 1715 0B8DE OB8DE Simplex SIL2 Simplex 501 1715 0B8DE OB8DE Duplex SIL2 Duplex 541 1715 0F8 OF8I Simplex SIL2 Simplex 951 1715 0F8 OF8I Duplex SIL2 Duplex 964 N A CRC Calculator N A N A Safety Reaction Time Calculations The 1715 AOJIs process data at a rate of the module RPI 2 For example if the 1715 IF16 RPI 100 m
46. Output Module to the Project e Adda 1715 OB8DE digital output module in Duplex mode to the 194 project e Adda 1715 OB8DE digital output module in Simplex mode to the project Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Step 1 Add a 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module in Duplex Mode 1 Toadda new 1715 OB8DE digital output module in Duplex mode to the project right click che 1715 AENTR adapter and choose New Module The Select Module dialog box appears Select Module Vendor Module Description 3 Analog Digital 1715 IB16D 16 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Input 8 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Output Electronically Fused Allen Bradley Allen Bradley 2 Expand the Digital module list and select the 1715 OB8DE module and click OK The General tab appears Module Properties AENTR 6 1715 OBSDE General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Fault Program Action Type 1715 OB8DE 8 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Output Electronically Fused Vendor Allen Bradley Parent AENTR Name Digital Output Module Duplex Module A Slot Module BSlot 7 Description Module Definition Reon n Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Redundant Yes SIL2 Safety No Status Offline 50K Cancel ov 3 Enter the parameters They are similar to the settings
47. Revision 2 1 Change Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Redundant No SIL2 Safety No culi umo Table 29 General Parameters for the Digital Input Module in Duplex Mode Parameters Description Type Displays the type and description of the module being created read only Vendor Displays the vendor of the module being created read only Parent Displays the name of the parent module read only Name Enter the name ofthe module Description Enter a description for the module here up to 128 characters You can use any printable character in this field If you exceed the maximum length the software ignores any extra characters Slot A Choose the slot number in which the module resides Slot B When your module is configured for duplex the slot number in which the redundant module resides is displayed When configured for duplex the Slot B field is shown for reference only Change Click Change to access the Module Definition dialog box From the Module Definition dialog box you can change the values that define the module definition Electronic Keying and Minor Revision 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System 3 Click Change The Module Definition dialog box appears Module Definition X Series A zj Revision 2 x 1 Bectronic Keying Compatible Module M J Connection Data X R
48. VALUE or GOTO SPECIFIED VALUE In Shutdown mode the analog output module will TURN OFF all channel status indicators irrespective of the value being output Energize on communication failure The 1715 Redundant I O System can bea part ofan energize on communication failure system This means that during a system fault the output module can be set so that the output is energized This is on a point by point basis The following are examples of energize to trip uses e A fan that runs a ventilation system e Emergency lights Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 151 Chapter3 Digital 1 0 Operation Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers Tag Module fault word Fault De energize to trip During output when a system fault occurs the output module can be set so that the output is de energized This is on a point by point basis The following are examples of de energize to trip uses e Motor starters e Safety contactors Disable Line Test The digital output module incorporates line test functionality that can report and indicate no load field faults This functionality can be enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking the box This is on a point by point basis The 1715 digital input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner listening controllers All input modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some output
49. a format the module accepts and that the values are within the range the module accepts otherwise the module can fault or the reconfiguration attempt can fail IMPORTANT Reconfiguring analog modules via ladder logic can be limited to functions that involve only the changing of values We do not recommend that enabling or disabling features be done via ladder logic Use the Logix Designer application to enable or disable these features Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 291 AppendixC Reconfigure a Module Online Notes 292 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 About PFD and PFH Calculations Determine Which Values to Use Appendix D PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL2 System Topic Page About PFD and PFH Calculations 293 Calculations for 1715 1 0 Modules 294 Probability of failure on demand PFD is the SIL value for a safety related system as related directly to order of magnitude ranges of its average probability of failure to satisfactorily perform its safety function on demand IEC 61508 quantifies this classification by stating that the frequency of demands for operation of the safety system is no greater than once per year in the Low Demand mode PFD calculations are commonly used for process safety applications and applications where emergency stop devices ESDs are used Although PFD values are associated with each of the three elements constituting
50. and dimmed when the Full or None diagnostic types are selected When the Custom diagnostic type is selected the default matches the Full thresholds Open Wire Detection Select if the thresholds allow for open wire detection for example if the threshold 2 value is not 0 By default the header checkbox is selected and all points 0 15 are selected If the header checkbox is cleared all points 0 15 are cleared To select open wire detection for a specific point check the checkbox in the appropriate row for that point To clear open wire detection for a specific point clear the checkbox in the appropriate row for that point Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 191 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Table 31 Configuration Parameters for Duplex Mode Parameters Description Latch Diagnostics Select if line fault alarms are latched until reset including Open Wire Detection and Short Circuit detection By default the header checkbox is selected and all points 0 15 are selected If the header checkbox is cleared all points 0 15 are cleared Reset Latch Diagnostics Click Reset to reset the diagnostic latch serviced Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Select whether Change of State is enabled when any diagnostic event occurs Full And Custom Diagnostics Require Use Of An Appropriate End of line Device Specifies that a custom end device
51. any safety related normally de energized outputs have you provided redundant power sources power l failure warning and line monitoring 2 Do energize to action configurations conform to the restrictions defined in this manual that must be applied L when using these configurations 3 For energize to action SIL 2 applications have dual output modules been configured l 308 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 AENTR Adapter Table 74 Input Tag Name Fault Status LinkStatus FullDuplex PortA1ANSTatus Data Type DINT Binary DINT bit field DINT bit field DINT bit field SINT enumerated Appendix F 1 0 Tag Definitions This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715 AENTR adapter Definition are present no Logix connection exits or reported data is invalid Adapter redundancy and power status Bit 0 ModAFault 0 good 1 fault or module not present Bit 1 ModBFault 0 good 1 fault or module not present Bit8 PowerlFault 0 good 1 fault or module not present Bit9 Power2Fault 0 good 1 fault or module not present Adapter Ethernet port status Bit 0 PortA1Connected 0 Inactive 12 Active Bit 2 PortA2Connected 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 3 PortB1 Connected 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 4 PortB2Connected 0 Inactive 1 Active Adapter Ethernet port half full duplex status
52. are routed to one input module In duplex configurations they are routed in parallel to two modules IMPORTANT These resistors must be considered as part of the field loop circuit Each channel has a 50 mA fuse to prevent component damage in over current situations Figure 48 Analog Input Termination Assembly Input Circuit Se pe eee eee nee eee Termination Assembly Analog Input Module F150mA Input Circuit Eee i 3211M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 109 Chapter2 Installation Instructions When an analog input module is configured as dual the analog field loop that is connected to channel 0 is automatically fed to both modules The system automatically votes the data from the input modules so that you have only one value that is presented to the application The application program is presented with channel 0 and channel 1 values in a fault tolerant manner so that if either input module is lost both values are still available to the application program Figure 49 1715 TASIF16 and 1715 TADIF16 Analog Input Termination Assemblies 1715 TASIF16 1715 TADIF16 Analog Input Simplex Analog Input Duplex Termination Assembly Termination Assembly Field Connections This Side Terminal Block Cable This Side CHOCH1 CH2CH3 CHACHS CH6 CH7_CH8CH9_CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15 O Channel FERGE CHT0 CHT1 CH12 CH13 CH14C
53. bottom of chassis Dimensions are in cm in Figure 12 Cabinet 15 3 6 0 8 15 3 20 6 0 8 0 Wireway Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 47 Chapter2 Installation Instructions IMPORTANT When installing the system in a chassis note that chassis are intended to be mounted horizontally only Install the modules in the chassis in a vertical orientation only 48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 System Hardware The 1715 Redundant I O System is a remote redundant I O system that was Components developed to communicate with a Logix controller in a ControlLogix enhanced redundant system by using the EtherNet IP network and includes these components A pair of 1715 AENTR adapters serves as a proxy for all EtherNet IP messages to and from redundant I O modules 1715 digital and analog I O modules A 1715 A2A dual redundant I O adapter base unit connects to a 1715 A3I0 I O module base unit to form the backplane for the system Termination assemblies that are configured in either Simplex or Duplex mode mount onto the base units to allow communication between the modules and the backplane Each I O module uses either a simplex termination assembly or a duplex termination assembly depending on the mode needed Each 1715 A31IO I O base unit holds up t
54. can hold up to 24 I O modules three I O modules per I O base unit when connected together The I O modules can be configured in any combination of simplex or duplex pairs depending on the mode of operation needed The I O base units can be connected directly to the adapter base unit and other I O base units or through expansion cables The 1715 Redundant I O System is a modular system in which the adapter and I O base units snap together by using mating connectors and retaining clips to form the backplane Modules can be removed and replaced without system interruption The base units via termination assemblies provide the interconnections for power adapter and I O data Once connected the base units form the single mechanical assembly or backplane Redundant 1715 Adapters The redundant partnered adapters monitor inputs outputs and diagnostics for the I O in the remote chassis If a fault occurs in one of the redundant adapters an IP address switchover occurs and I O monitoring and communication to the ControlLogix System continues without interruption This switchover is transparent to the user Status indicators and status information available to the ControlLogix application enables you to determine the status of each 1715 AENTR adapter Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 15 Chapter1 Redundancy System Overview System Architecture 1715 1 0 Modules Both digital and analog I O modules are availa
55. correct for incoming p IB 18D Duplex SIL2 ir Reset Config Data db Cut Instruction Ctrlex Input Data Copy Instruction Ctrl C Reconciled Input Data CRTL Countdown Delete Instruction Name IB16Tag Number Discarded Data Packets Add Ladder Element Edit Main Operand Descripti Description Canes Save Instruction Defaults Clea efaults Help i Go To Instruction Help Usage normal s ete Type Base gt Connection e Alias For X Open Instruction Logic Dear Ister Dereon Data Type e BD Duplex SIL2 Es Properties Scope f MyStdProj External n Bea Resd wiite Style Constant Open Configuration 3 Create a reset tag by using the default data type and Read Write External Access Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 The tag can be controller or program scoped Ej qo Open Configuration 4 Choose the module configuration tag If you have multiple modules be sure to choose the configuration tag for the appropriate module Verify SIL2 check data is correct for incoming packets IB16D Duplex SIL2 Verify SIL2 check data is correct for incoming p IB16D Duplex SIL2 IB16Tag Data Valid Reset ResetTag Valid Data being rcvd oe Reset Tiedown Fault C
56. damage to the system can result N ATTENTION Maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 139 Chapter3 Digital 1 0 Operation Determining Input Module Compatibility 140 Common Features The table lists several features available on 1715 digital I O modules Feature Description Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP You can remove and insert modules while power is applied Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic Fault and diagnostic detection capabilities that provide detection you the information necessary to most effectively and efficiently use your module and troubleshoot your application The 1715 digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether they are ON or OFF The 1715 digital input modules convert DC ON OFF signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the 1715 Redundant I O System Typical input devices include the following e Proximity switches e Limit switches e Selector switches e Float switches e Push button switches When designing a system by using 1715 digital input modules you must consider these items e The voltage necessary for your application e Whether you need a solid state device e Current leakage e If your application uses sinking or sourcing wiring For more information on digital input modules see the 1715 Technical Specifications publ
57. discrepancy alarms must be monitored by the application program and used to provide an alarm to operations personnel e Equipment must be installed and wired in accordance with the product installation and wiring instructions in this manual e For energize to action systems you must follow the additional requirements on page 217 The maximum duration for single channel operation of I O modules depends on the specific process and must be specified individually for each application For high availability Rockwell Automation suggests you use two 1715 AENTR adapters If one of the modules faults the adapters can operate in a simplex arrangement up to the duration of the mean time to repair MT TR when used in SIL 2 applications Energize to action Requirements Certain applications can require energize to action for inputs or outputs or both IMPORTANT Energize to action configurations can be used only if the following apply e Atleast two independent power sources must be used for both the system and field supplies The system provides the power supply monitoring but this needs to be connected in the application These power sources must provide emergency power for a safe process shutdown or a time span that is required by the application e Each power source must feature power integrity monitoring with safety critical input read back into the system controller or implicit power monitoring that is provided by the 1 0 modules Any power
58. eS i DO CHO DOCHI NJ DO CH2 DOCH3 DocH4 i DO CHS VFIELD RTN S ov 3 9 DO CH6 p NS DO CH7 MEM cc ccc 0 0 MC E EE LL 33004 M DO Duplex Output Connections Figure 42 Digital Output Termination Assembly Field Wiring V2 Vit Wi Ov ov OV T5 OV Next TA V2 d if fitted 32105 M DOTA Field Wiring CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 103 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 104 Digital Output Slew Tolerance It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal input current slewing that channels can be declared faulted as a consequence of diagnostics that are otherwise designed to ensure the channels are operating within their designed safety accuracy To avoid spurious declaration of channel faults it is necessary to ensure that the field supply voltage and output signal condition satisfies the maximum slew rate criteria that are defined in the 1715 Redundant I O System Specifications Technical Data publication 1715 T D001 So it can be necessary to condition the field supply voltage or output signal such as by filtering Field Loop Circuits for Digital Outputs The field loop circuit for a digital output is shown in Figure 43 IMPORTANT Thefield power 5A fuses comply with UL508 requirements The 5A fuses are No 396 TE5 5A time lag fuse UL 248 14 125 V T Leadfree manufactured by Littelfuse e You can use Class 2 power supplies for the 24V DC
59. euo Sc Ere Eee uou a eid 65 Bases nis csse dup po iR tea tea Men es eevee RE OU MUS 66 Install Summarys xis e tines EEEE EE ees emo dede acid 68 Step 1 Enclosure DIN Rail Assembly uuueeuse 68 Step 2 Build the System e es EE Es 68 Product Dimensions essi ect r a EE tes vatcosfrovU tet its 69 DIN Rail Mounting Dimensions cee eee eee eee 69 DIN Raith ssembly acetic ubt tO RV xlex eU d E Cee the 70 Component Size and Weights ccususexesereesusko hier H tenes 70 Install the Power Supply esos iet o eu EE XPRUx Nie emt RENE 73 Install the Adapter Base Unt cieli ches eso oe er REUS 74 Install the I O Base Unit erre euch ie agen ee 7 Install Termination Assembly to I O Base Unit usus 77 Mount Termination Assemblies e ees pdt let cin edd ove 78 Mount I O Expansion Cables 5 eerie ose e RAT ETT ESTE 80 Cable AstcembDes2s caves Sos alien pare ioa uA abel ei wee S in ag 80 Expansion Cable 2er E Peor ERE ee edes 81 Install Expansion Cable sirbir reana pee oru o Leer eso tds 82 Wire the Adapter rose EI i eH pe Sie 86 Connect the 24V DC System Power Leeeeeer re tmr 86 Wire the Ground Connection sets esee eet oed vh ek the 88 Connect Field Wiring pocer daroia etse a sque eraxE E E EEEE E 89 Recommended Circuits for Digital Inputs 005 90 Recommended Circuits for Digital Outputs 05 97 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module Functional Block Diagram 99 Recommended Cir
60. failure must trigger an alarm e Unless provided implicitly in the 1 0 modules all safety critical inputs and outputs must be fitted with external line and load integrity monitoring and safety critical read back of the line status signals Any line or load failure must trigger an alarm e The application program must be designed to shut down energize to action SIL 2 safety instrumented functions if a faulty simplex adapter or output module has not been replaced within the mean time to repair MITR e For SIL 2 high demand energize to action applications you must use two output modules In cases where one or more outputs is used in an energize to action configuration all specific requirements that are listed previously must be implemented for all associated inputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 217 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Requirements for ControlLogix based SIL 2 Applications Using the 1715 Adapter in SIL 2 Applications 218 IMPORTANT SIL 1 applications must use the wiring and measures that are defined for SIL 2 applications Energize to action requires line monitoring for any SIL application Add On Instructions The Add On Instructions provide a mechanism to verify the validity of data that is transferred between the ControlLogix controller and the 1715 adapter When you use the Add On Instructions the sender of the data adds check data to
61. field voltage instead of the two 5A fuses The NEC defines Class 2 as providing less than 100 watts at 24V e When digital output modules are configured as a redundant pair the minimum load current that is required for channels with line monitoring is 20 mA Figure 43 Digital Output Simplex or Duplex Field Loop Circuit Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 24V DC Field Power Source 24V DC Power Distribution Field espere re Terminals OV Termination Assembly 33002 M ImportantkoinductivloadspackMbrotectioniod ittedthtoad Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 105 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Recommended Circuits for Analog Inputs This section describes the layout for analog inputs 1715 TASIF16 Analog Input Termination Assembly Functional Block Diagram Figure 44 is the diagram for the analog input termination assembly Figure 44 1715 Analog Input Termination Assembly Functional Block Field ieiunii Assembly Inputs Dual Input ChannelO 4 Measurement Isolator SPI DM Device Pash Typical Circuit nu cee cera Channel1 4 Channel2 H 1 0 Command Bus T Response Bu
62. i i i input zou pnus x S l e Je JS d module a O JA fe a 3 e Jel 3 2 R 1715 A 2 001 16 IF16 channel analog 2 5 E S S j 7 5 input zou pnus le l la Hos a mE ag module m e e J2 IS qum quem wm pe TA 1715 A 2 001 8 OB8DE channel digital E S S 8 2 output di di P es E d 2 E module 83 2 2 2 J J2 Js Jae IR 1715 A 2 001 8 OF8l channel analog E S S E ES output eoque aus le zo la m module 2 P Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 301 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Appendix D Energize to action 1 year Proof Test Interval Table 69 Energize to action 1 year Proof Test Interval Duplex Configuration z 2 5 S 3 e Se o v x E 2 E wu uis 8073 04 60 3881 60 3881 60 3cCl 60 39 pay azoo 10 3568 QqcooL 10 309 QqcooL 10 309 zoo 10 389 700 90 31Cv 60 420 S 0L 3cC8 0L 3CC8 60 359 60 3vC l L l CUL 10 F30 10 F30 LO IZE6 CO I9L C 00 3691 10 F3S LO ASL E 4671 UE 0 L 9680 9680 0 L 9680 0 L 9607L L0 3t 0 L LO JEEE 0 L LO 3v V 0 L 10 378 v i 90 4S 8 90 35 8 0 359 y 10 3091 V 60 JLL L 60 JLL L 60 3 9 8 80 39 V PTI 1 0 Years MTTR 24 Hours
63. if necessary e The Input States When CRTL Expires tab lets you define the safe state for inputs For more information on SIL 2 application requirements for 1715 I O modules see these resources e Chapter 7 starting on page 233 for information about Add On Instructions for SIL 2 1715 I O module applications 1 See the Module Revision Release List available from the Product Certifications link on http www ab com 212 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 e Appendix E starting on page 293 for PFD and PFH calculations e Appendix F starting on page 307 for a SIL 2 application checklist e Using ControlLogix controllers in SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference Manual publication 1756 RM001 for detailed requirements for installing programming and operating a SIL 2 ControlLogix based safety system e For specifications and certifications relating to a 1715 Redundant I O system refer to the 1715 Redundant I O System Technical Specifications publication 1715 T D001 These 1715 devices can be included in a SIL 2 system Table 39 1715 Devices in a SIL 2 System Cat No Firmware Description Termination Assembly Revision Cat No Description 1715 AENTR 2 001 or Ethernet adapter redundant module N A later 1715 TASIB16D Digital input simplex 1715 IB16D 16 channel digital input module 1
64. indicators are RED In a group arrangement one module can be in shutdown while the other can continue to be online and in the Run mode and regulate the output according to the commanded values When the module is communicating with the processors in Shutdown mode it transitions to the Ready mode If there is an application running it transitions to the Recover mode Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 161 Chapter 4 162 Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features Ready Mode All channels are off when in the Ready mode the Ready indicator is GREEN and the Run indicator is RED while the channel indicators are OFF When an application is started the module transitions to the Run mode When a module loses communication with the processor then it transitions back to the Shutdown mode Run Mode In the Run mode all channels regulate the output current to the commanded value for each individual channel The Ready and Run indicators are GREEN You must make sure that all user required values have been set by using RSLogix 5000 or Logix Designer application before transitioning the module to Run mode If for any reason a module does not receive commanded values then the module transitions to the Shutdown mode Shutdown States You can configure the channel shutdown states to do one of the following e Turn off de energize the channel e Hold last state e Regulate the output to a specified value
65. is a quick installation reference For more detailed status indicator information see Appendix A Table 14 Start up Sequence 1715 IB16D 1715 OB8DE 1715 IF16 and 1715 0F8l Modules Indicator Status Module Status Green Redundancy Status Off Network Status Red Channel 0 7 8 15 Off 7 Turn the locking screw on the front of the module a 1 4 turn clockwise to lock see page 124 e The Redundancy Status indicator of the 1715 IB16D digital input module shows RED when the screw is locked e The Redundancy Status indicator of the 1715 IF16 analog input module shows RED when the screw is locked The module enters its start up sequence This takes approximately 3 seconds If the module is the first module in a TA group with a running adapter it displays the following status indicators See Table 15 Table 15 First Module in TA Group 1715 IB16D 1715 OB8DE and 1715 IF16 1715 0F8l Module Modules Indicator Status Indicator Status Module Status Green Module Status Green Redundancy Status Green Redundancy Status Red to steady green Network Status Amber Network Status Amber Channel 0 7 8 15 Off Channel 0 7 Off Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 133 Chapter 2 Install Slot Filler Covers 134 Installation Instructions 8 Ifthe module is installed next to other modules that are already online the start up sequence completes W
66. is available in the input tag Input range Fixed as 0 20 mA Wiring Single ended only Data format Read only Scaling Support choice of signal and engineering range Underrange overrange Diagnostic alarms are provided when the signal goes above or below what the module can detect Zero or less is considered underrange Rolling timestamp 1 ms resolution Real time sample rate Table 52 1715 OF8I Module Diagnostic Features Feature Redundancy level Fixed RTS Description Simplex or duplex Redundancy status The status of each module is available in the input tag Input range Fixed as 0 20 mA Scaling Support choice of signal and engineering range ReadBack The state of each output point is reflected in the input tag 256 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Table 52 1715 OF8I Module Diagnostic Features Feature Hold for initialization and enable Fault mode Fault value Redundant 1 0 System Diagnostics Chapter 8 Description Hold for initialization causes outputs to hold present state until the value commanded by the controller matches the value at the output screw terminal within 0 1 of full scale providing a bumpless transfer A bit in the configuration tag selects whether Hold For Initialization is used A bit in the input tag indicates when a channel is holding When a connection from a controller exists and the connection is interrupted
67. is in the off state No load detection can be disabled to prevent alarms from appearing for unused points Short circuit detection A fault is indicated when a short circuit over current condition is detected The fault indication is reset when the following occurs 1 Point is commanded off 2 Ashort reset service is sent to the module 3 A reset is done through a bit in the output tag Diagnostic latch When latching is enabled diagnostic alarms are latched until they are reset This aids in detecting intermittent issues For output modules latch reset can occur either through messaging or through a member of the output tag Fault mode When a connection from a controller exists and the connection is interrupted the module outputs take on a user selected state This Fault mode is either Off On or Hold Last State Program mode Program to fault enable When a connection from a controller exists and the controller is not in Run mode the module outputs take on a user selected state This Program a k a Idle mode is either Off On or Hold Last State When enabled the outputs assume the fault value when a communication fault occurs while in Program mode ReadBack Table 51 1715 IF16 Module Diagnostic Features Feature Redundancy level The state of each output point is reflected in the input tag Description Simplex or duplex Redundancy status The status of each module
68. le RE J 2g S HS s sz ug e S S s dule a 2 Be 2 a 5 De o S ke X E S S mo eon N wo nr eo an ce nd oo N ce eo oo N 1715 A 2 001 16 IF16 channel an o co 2 e Oo 5 5 o a mo J 9 12 2 jg e 3 te Z E Eme be inpu ea o N co a N E E rs a dule in E Bs 2 a 5 x De o S ke X Ez S 2 mo en N wo nr e a ce oo N e oo N 1715 A 2 001 8 channel N By n OB8DE digital ES 3 S amp F 8 S S E opt JE e jg e IS e amp 8 e is le 8 8 Ie 8 mode FS 2 JR JR 8 2 J IX W JS Je 2 I i2 Jefe S3 amp JR 1715 A 2 001 8 channel Pe N Oral analog S E e F s S ES 3 S opt e je e e 3 72 e je is amp S g module ws le wn 3 EN p B a z z exules amp e Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 303 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Appendix D Energize to action 2 year Proof Test Interval Table 71 Energize to action 2 year Proof Test Interval Duplex Configuration uis 803 04 60 3881 60 3881 60 3cCl 60 39 way cool azoo 700 cool zool 204d 90 3681 10 3668 10 366 8 L0 3068 90 38 4 9Hid 60 3806 0L 3CC8 0L 3CC8 60 3 9 60 38 13H L L L L L gb CO 3v0c 10 F36L Y 10 36 TO JE9 L C0 360 v Simplex Configuration PTI 2 0 Years MTTR 24 Hours C0 I06 7 107 3606 107 3606 COTIEET CO 41L0 9 0 L
69. module 1 4 turn counter clockwise The screw slot is vertical when the module is unlocked Unlocked Position 32084M Turn locking screw 1 4 turn counter clockwise until vertical Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 135 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 2 Carefully remove the module from the base unit Pull straight out a Dowel Pins IMPORTANT Make sure that you pull the module straight out when removing it from the base unit Do not rock or tilt the module while pulling it out as it could damage the dowel pins 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Digital Module Overview Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 Topic Page 1715 Digital Module Overview 137 Determining Input Module Compatibility 140 Determining Output Module Compatibility 11 Using Features Common to 1715 Standard Digital 1 0 11 Modules Features Specific to 1715 1B16D Digital Input Modules 143 Features Specific to 1715 OBD8E Digital Output Modules 147 Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and 152 Controllers Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and 153 Controllers The 1715 digital I O modules are I O modules that provide On Off detection and actuation By using the Producer Consumer network model digital I O modules can produce information when needed while providing more
70. settings automatically using BOOTP C Obtain IP settings automatically using DHCP IF settings set by switches on the module IP Settings Configuration Physical Module IP Address 192 168 1 16 Subnet Mask 255 285 255 0 Gateway Address 192 168 d 1 Domain Name ft Primary DNS Sever 0 0 0 O Address Host Name N Secondary DNS u Server Address 0 0 0 0 Refresh communication Set e Status Running Cancel Apply Help Table 26 Internet Protocol Parameters Parameters Description Internet Protocol IP Settings Displays the IP settings Configuration mode of the module Click the appropriate button to configure the IP settings e Manually configure the IP settings Obtain IP settings automatically by using BOOTP e Obtain IP settings automatically by using DHCP Internet Protocol IP Settings controls appear dimmed when Offline e online and a module mismatch or communication error occurs BOOTP or DHCP is not supported IP Settings Configuration Physical Module IP Address Displays the physical IP address of the module or if you chose to configure the IP settings manually enter a valid physical module IP address Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask of the module or if you chose to configure the IP settings manually enter a valid subnet mask Gateway Address Displays the gateway IP address of the module or if you chose to configure the IP settings manually ente
71. shutdown mechanism when a fault is detected 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 2 Wire Analog Input Installation Instructions Chapter 2 IMPORTANT __ Ifa fault occurs during normal operation in a duplex configured system a faulted input module can be removed and replaced without disrupting the input signals to a live system Use extreme caution when removing and inserting 1 0 modules under power because bending or damaging the pins can fault the system The module also monitors the input data paths and can detect faults within each input channel A visual indication of the module status and individual channel status is provided by an array of front panel indicators and can be connected to tags within the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application The termination assemblies can accept one or two input modules Each termination assembly provides passive signal load termination and over voltage protection for each input channel The system provides flexible input connectivity by mating specific termination assemblies with the relevant number of input modules Field Loop Circuits for Analog Inputs These circuits can be used for simplex and duplex configurations of analog input modules Fit a fuse in each circuit to help protect the field wiring This field loop connection method is used for two wire field devices Figure 45 Two wire Analog Input Field Loop Circuit 24V DC Termination Ass
72. state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is an anomaly with the module the commanded state and the Output Data Echo cannot not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions Ifa fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo cannot not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the Output Data Echo check your output module for these conditions e Communication fault e Connection is inhibited e Blown fuse Module does not turn on output if overload short circuit is detected Fusing Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature helps protect the module from electrical damage Other modules require external fusing The 1715 OB8DE module uses electronic fusing You can reset an electronic fuse through the Logix Designer application or through ladder logic running on a controller This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault See Table 18 to determine what fuse to use in your application Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1 Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other cod
73. system functions The 1715 digital I O modules mount in a 1715 Redundant I O System and use an I O termination assembly that is mounted in an I O base unit to communicate via redundant 1715 adapters Before you install and use your module you must do the following e Install and ground a user supplied 24V DC power supply e Determine if you are using your digital I O module in Simplex or Duplex mode e Install the correct termination assembly that is based on your determination for either simplex or duplex operation e Configure the project in RSLogix 5000 software or the Logix Designer application to accept the number and type of modules for the project Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 137 Chapter 3 138 Digital 1 0 Operation Each digital I O module is an isolated module that plugs into one position of the I O base unit and a termination assembly that is mounted to the base unit Digital I O modules can be configured in RSLogix programming software as simplex or duplex and then by selecting one of the two available termination assemblies and the required number of modules Termination assemblies provide termination for the field I O channels and by the use of coding pegs and sockets are matched to a specific digital I O module Module keying can also be set in the project Field connections are made at the terminal block connectors on the termination assembly The digital I O module
74. tab appears 5 Module Properties AENTR 12 1715 OF8I 2 1 aes General Connection Module info A Module Info B Configuration Limits Fault Program Action Low it Hold for Engineering Status Offline Table 36 Analog Output Configuration Parameters Duplex Mode Parameters Description Channel Click the channel number to configure parameters for the specified channel 0 15 Current Range Displays the current range 0 20 mA for the channel This field is read only Low Signal Check the Low Signal value for the channel between 0 0 20 0 mA The default is 4 0 mA This value must be less than the High Signal value Low Signal and Low Engineering values are shown in pairs Low Engineering Check the Low Engineering value for the channel between 9999999 99999999 The default is 0 0 Low Signal and Low Engineering values are shown in pairs High Signal Check the High Signal value for the channel between 0 0 20 0 mA The default is 20 0 mA This value must be greater than the Low Signal value High Signal and High Engineering values are shown in pairs High Engineering Check the High Engineering value for the channel between 9999999 99999999 The default is 100 0 High Signal and High Engineering values are shown in pairs Hold for Initialization 206 Set the channel to hold or not chan
75. the values must still be voted in the application program in the same way as previously stated but the system has less fault tolerance as the loss of one module removes one of the inputs Figure 50 Connections to 1715 TASIF16 Simplex Nonisolated Analog Input Termination Assembly 16 channel 32115M Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0 5 Nem 0 37 Ibeft to the terminal screws Figure 51 Connections to 1715 TADIF16 Duplex Isolated Analog Input Termination Assembly CHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12CH13 CH14 CH15 CHO CH14 CH24 CH34 CH4 4 CH5 CH64 CH7 CH8 4CH9 EH10 H 1 14 H124 H13 H144EH15 32110M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 111 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0 5 Nem 0 37 Ibeft to the terminal screws Recommended Wiring for Analog Output Modules This section describes the wiring for analog outputs Field Wiring of Analog Output Termination Assemblies Figure 52 1715 TASOF8 and 1715 TADOF8 Analog Output Termination Assemblies 1715 TASOF8 1715 TADOF8 Analog Output Simplex Analog Output Duplex Termination Assembly Termination Assembly Field Connections This Side Field Connections This Side Fuse Cover Fuse Covers pP 32123 M 32122M Polarizing
76. this manual are calculated with formulas explained in IEC 61508 Part 6 Annex B See IEC 61508 Part 6 for more information about calculating PFD values for your system 294 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System PFD Calculations with 10 hour MTTR Appendix D The PFD calculations in Table 59 are calculated for a 1 year proof test interval 8760 hours and are specific to1715 I O components in ControlLogix systems Table 59 1 year PFD Calculations for 1715 1 0 Components Cat No 1715 AENTR Firmware Version Description PFDde 1 21E 04 Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration PFDe PFDde PFDe 1 55E 04 4 65E 07 7 84E 07 1715 1B16D 1715 IF16 4 04 06 16 channel analog input module 4 04E 06 6 31E 06 6 31E 01 4 29E 07 4 29E 07 4 48E 07 4 48E 07 1715 OB8DE x A 2 001 Ethernet adapter redundant module X X 8 channel digital output module 1 52E 06 4 14E 05 3 03E 06 4 16E 07 1715 0F8l X 1 Calculated MTBF and PFD by FMEA to 61508 2000 2 For the latest approved versions see the Revision Release List available from the Product Certifications link at http www ab com 2 91E 06 8 channel analog output module De energize to trip 1 year Proof Test Interval Table 60 De energize to trip 1 year Proof Test Interval 1 53E 04
77. to the output modules A reset is necessary begin providing valid application data Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 237 Chapter7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Add On Instruction Inputs The Add On Instructions use these inputs Table 43 Add On Instruction Inputs Input Config Data Description The Add On Instruction gets the appropriate SIL 2 check data values from this module defined configuration tag The instruction uses this check data to populate the 1715 output data and verify the 1715 input data You must point to this tag when configuring the Add On Instruction Requested Output Data Only for output modules This user defined Requested Output Data tag contains data from the program logic The output Add On Instruction takes this requested output data adds the check data and places this data in the module defined Output Data tag Output Data This is the raw data sent to the 1715 module You must point to this tag when configuring the Add On Instruction Reconciled Input Data Ifthe Add On Instruction examines the check data and determines that the input data is valid the data in this tag is a duplicate of the original data that is received from the input module If the Add On Instruction examines the check data and determines that the data is not valid the safe state values are substituted in the Reconciled Input Data tag This i
78. two input modules Each assembly provides passive signal load termination and fuse over voltage protection on each input channel The system provides flexible and scalable input connectivity through mating termination assemblies with the relevant number of input modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 93 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 94 Field Wiring of Digital Input Termination Assemblies The termination assembly routes each digital input through a circuit See Figure 33 The input channel is protected with a 50 mA fuse When an extreme over voltage is applied to the input the fuse blows Each digital input signal is terminated by 5 11 kQ high reliability load and is fed to the input circuit of the input module Figure 33 1715 TASIB16D Digital Input Termination Assembly Input Circuit ve 50 mA Time Lag 24V Digital Fuse Field Input Channel Power amp Signal Isolator ve J1 J2 i4 1715 TASIB16D Termination Assembly i 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module 32101M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Figure 34 1715 TASIB16D and 1715 TADIB16D Digital Input Termination Assemblies 1715 TASIB16D Digital Input 1715 TADIB16D Digital Input Simplex Termination Duplex Termination Assembly Assembly Terminal Block Cable Entry This Side Field Connections This Side CHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8CH9 CH10CH11C
79. unlatch a High Limit Alarm online only Unlatch High Clamp is enabled when online including Hard Run mode and when Latch Limit Alarms is selected Unlatch High Clamp is dimmed when offline and online including Hard Run mode when Latch Limit Alarms is cleared Low Clamp Limit Enter a Low Clamp Limit between 9999999 99999999 The default is 0 0000 The Low Clamp Limit must be less than the High Clamp Limit Any out of range value causes a profile validation error LO appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode Unlatch Low Clamp Limit Click Unlatch Low Clamp Limit to send a message to the module to unlatch a Low Limit Alarm online only Unlatch Low Clamp is enabled when online including Hard Run mode and when Latch Limit Alarms is selected Unlatch Low Clamp is dimmed when offline and online including Hard Run mode when Latch Limit Alarms is cleared Unlatch All Click Unlatch All to send a message to the module to unlatch all latched alarms High Limit Low Limit and Ramp Alarm Ramp in Run Mode Check this checkbox to establish whether to limit the rate of change of the output If selected then changes due to command values fault actions and program actions are limited to the specified ramp rate Ramp Rate Enter the maximum ramp rate for changes in the output value in seconds The default is blank which results in an auditing error This default forces you to enter an appropriate
80. up to three I O modules on an I O base unit The I O base unit has an incoming I O base connector on the left hand side of the unit an outgoing I O base connector on the right hand side and on the front connections for three I O termination assemblies and three I O modules The locations for each I O termination assembly and I O module connectors are paired and together represent an I O module slot 7A Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 To mount the 1715 A3IO base unit follow these steps 1 Mount each 1715 A3IO base unit onto the DIN rails to the right of the 1715 A2A adapter base unit 2 Slide the base unit to the left until the joining connectors are fully mated Vo MO Adapter Base Unit Retaining Clip Mating Connector DIN Rails Retaining Clip 45247 3 Secure the I O base unit onto the DIN rails by sliding the bottom retaining lever below the base unit as far to the left as it goes until it latches in the locked position Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 75 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Insert the retaining clips into the top and the bottom slots to connect the adapter base unit to the I O base unit Retaining Clip NN 1 0 Bas PNE DIN Rails 45247 Retaining Lev
81. use two 1715 AENTR adapters in simplex and duplex SIL 2 applications Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using 1715 0 Modules in SIL 2 Applications 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 Reaction to Faults The 1715 AENTR adapter reports faults via status indicators that turn red when a fault is detected in the adapter Fault indications are also sent to the user application These variables provide the following information e Module presence e Module health and status e Channel health and status e An echo of the front panel indications I O modules can be replaced or installed online without affecting controller operation provided at least one module is installed and is fully operational However each module must be installed one at a time and allowed to start up before the next module is installed Input Modules The simplex and duplex termination assemblies are safety critical that is an input or output that is attached to a field device and provide termination for 16 channels They connect the field signals to the input modules Both digital and analog input termination assembly circuits have fuse protection Input modules support high availability when configured for duplex operation and using the appropriate termination assembly Input modules can be configured to operate in SIL 2 energize to action or de energize to trip applications Reactions to Faul
82. value e Hold Last State Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 221 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications lll Module Properties my1715adptr 4 1715 OB8DE 2 1 E E ni xi n Connection SIL2 Safety Module Info A Module Info B Input States When CRTL Expires Configuration Fault Program Action 4 Output State During Program Mode Fault Mode ke Ie lalalalala ke Ie Is Is halala Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help el Analog Output Modules The analog output module can be used in applications where the output current is in the range 4 20 mA during normal operation including trip action value and where 0 mA is the fail safe value In these applications one 1715 OF8I output module is sufficient for SIL 2 requirements two modules provide a 1002 level The analog output module is rated at SIL 2 as a fail safe simplex module and when used in a 1002 configuration as a duplex module with these features Commanded values and scaling factor The fail safe lowest commanded value irrespective of the scaling factor is 0 mA The application cannot change the scaling factor only an online update can change the scaling factor Fail safe guard band The fail safe guar
83. verify the network mask address The other fields are optional depending on your network and or IT requirements Verify or complete as needed 7 Click OK 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Install the 1 0 Modules The I O modules that are used for the 1715 Redundant I O system are as follows e 1715 IB16D 16 channel digital input module e 1715 OB8DE 8 channel digital output module e 1715 IF16 16 channel analog input module e 1715 OFS8I 8 channel analog output module Figure 57 1 0 Modules 1715 IB16D 16 channel Digital Input 1715 OB8DE 8 channel Digital 1715 IF16 16 channel Analog Input 1715 0F8l 8 channel Analog Output Module Output Module Module Module DIGITAL INPUT 1715 IB16D Allen Bradley ANALOG OUTPUT 1715 OF8l Allen Bradley DIGITAL OUTPUT 1715 OB8DE Allen Bradley ANALOG INPUT 1715 IF16 Allen Bradley Healthy Ready Run Healthy Ready Run Healthy Ready Run Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 af Channel 08 Channel 09 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 Healthy Ready Run Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 af Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 at Channel 08 Channel 09 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 1
84. you can define custom threshold values or use a set of preset default values The types of threshold values you choose initially for the module become inherent in each channel you can define different thresholds for individual channels later The threshold values determine which end of line EOL resistor value you choose and vice versa depending on whether you choose the threshold values first or the EOL resistor values first Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 275 AppendixB 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics By considering these two components EOL resistor values and the threshold values we can arrive at the diagnostic settings for the module Figure 70 Common EOL Device Scenario 45678 Figure 71 Threshold Settings m Custom Thresholds x Rising Faling Thresholds Thresholds Short Circuit On On Indeterminate Off Off 276 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Appendix B Threshold Diagnostics Settings There are three types of threshold diagnostics settings to choose from in the Logix Designer application e Full Diagnostics Configuration e None Diagnostics Configuration e Custom Diagnostics Configuration Module Properties Adapter Module 2 1715 IB16D 1 1 ieneral Connection Module Info A Module InfoB Configuration Enable Change of State ea Diagn
85. 001D EN P September 2015 85 ee ee MJ amp NE LUSE amp Chapter2 Installation Instructions Wire the Adapter The 1715 adapter base unit has a series of screw terminal blocks to terminate power connections to ease cable installation Connect the 24V DC System Power The 1715 modules are designed to operate from two independent 24V DC sources with a common return Power is connected to the two plugs PWR 1 and PWR 2 on the adapter base plate Power is distributed to the I O modules through the base units Figure 27 Connect System Power 24V DC 24V DC 32065 M1 to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with safety extra ATTENTION To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD all connections low voltage SELV or protected extra low voltage PELV must be powered from a UL Listed source compliant with Limited Voltage f ATTENTION To comply with UL restrictions all connections to this equipment Current per UL 508 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 For each power supply connection follow these steps 1 Connect the negative line from the power supply typically labeled OV to the left hand terminal 2 Connect the positive line from the power supply typically labeled 24V to the right hand terminal 3 Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0 5 Nem 0 37 lbeft t
86. 059M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 55 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 1 0 Termination Assemblies I O termination assemblies are inserted into the I O base units There are eight types of termination assemblies two for each module depending on the architecture of your system and the I O modules you are going to use Table 5 1 0 Termination Assembly Descriptions 1 0 Module Termination Assembly Cat No Termination Assembly Description 1715 IB16D 1715 TASIB16D Digital input simplex 1715 TADIB16D Digital input duplex 1715 0B8DE 1715 TASOB8DE Digital output simplex 1715 TADOB8DE Digital output duplex 1715 IF 16 1715 TASIF16 Analog input simplex 1715 TADIF16 Analog input duplex 1715 0F8l 1715 TASOF8 Analog output simplex 1715 TADOF8 Analog output duplex Digital Input Termination Assemblies Digital input termination assemblies support these features e 16 channel simplex TA provides termination for 16 digital input channels e Industry standard field device connections at terminal blocks e 24V DC digital input channels with a load of 5 11 ko per input channel e Individually fused channels with over voltage input protection There are two types of digital input termination assemblies e A1715 TASIBI6D 16 channel simplex TA that provides termination for 16 digital input channels and mates with one 1715 IB16D digital input module e A1715 TADIBI6D 16 channel duplex TA that p
87. 120 Install the Adapters 121 Assign an IP Address 125 Install the 1 0 Modules 131 Install Slot Filler Covers 134 Remove Modules 135 This chapter explains how to build the 1715 Redundant I O System These installation instructions include how to build the backplane by connecting the adapter and I O base units and mounting them on DIN rails within a cabinet how to install and wire the termination assemblies how to mount the adapter and the I O modules onto the system and how to use expansion cables to allow for additional space requirements for the system within an enclosure Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 33 Chapter 2 A gt gt gt gt 3 A Installation Instructions Environment and Enclosure ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category Il applications as defined in IEC 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 m 6562 ft without derating This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio communication services in such environments This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame
88. 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 2 With a pair of small long nosed pliers remove and replace the blown fuse Lift door to access fuses Oo o oJ So esie Fuses ren foe 12345 12345 12325 12345 stricte EE L 1 ca frm fom om a H i 32060 M Use replacement fuse four A slow blow fuses in OMNI BLOK holders manufactured by Littelfuse Remove and replace with a pair of long nosed pliers Figure 15 Power Routing of Adapter Base Unit Fuses Adapter Base F1 a CH F2 ob F3 5 H F4 4 ME J17 J19 lt x m 8 E a a Io o o o x lt Fuses F1 and F3 have independent tags under the 1715 AENTR module status flags For example in Figure 16 F3 is blown or adapter power is missing to the PWR 2 connector Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 53 Chapter 2 54 Installation Instructions Figure 16 Fuse Tags E AENTR 1715 FE AENTR 1715 S Fault NTR_1715 S Mod4Fault L4 S PAENTR_I715 S ModBFaut L NIR 1 1 Power Fault EAENTRLI7ISS Power2Faut The F2 and F4 fusing faul
89. 1756 EWEB A 5 01 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A ih 3 02 1756 CNB E 1756 CNB E 11 005 192 168 1 110 1756 EN2TR 1756 EN2TR A 192 168 1 112 1756 EN2TR 1756 EN2TR A 68 1 120 1715 AENTR Redundant I O EtherNet IPAdapter 1715 AENTR 3 Backplane 1715 A11 02 1756 EN2T 1756 EN2T C 03 1756 IB16I A 1756 IBI6I A DCIN ISOL 04 1756 OB16I A 1756 OB16I A DCOUT ISOL 05 1756 IB16D A 1756 IB16D 4 DCIN DIAG Q01 06 1756 OB16D A 1756 OB16D A DCOUT DIAG 07 1756 IB16D A 1756 IB16D 4 DCIN DIAG Not Browsing 3 Choose Upload EDS file from device from the pull down menu i Remove Driver Diagnostics Configure Driver Upload EDS File From d Security Device Properties Module Statistics Module Configuration 166 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 4 Follow the prompts in the Rockwell Automation EDS Wizard Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard X Welcome to Rockwell Automation s EDS Wizard c eanED oman unkri upload EDS file s stored in a device ia In the rare case that you must update an EDS file you have to go to Get Support Now to obtain the correct files Also note that when you download the EDS files you see the Chassis EDS files that you do not see if you upload from the module These files are necessary for chassis selection choices only in the Logix Designer applicati
90. 2 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 af e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Q Q Q Q Q Q o o Q o o Q o o O O 32092 M 32090 M 32091 M 32089 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 131 Chapter 2 132 Installation Instructions Modules are installed by pressing them onto the 1715 A3IO three slot base unit Follow these steps 1 2 Inspect the connector pins see page 121 Inspect the identification labels on the sides of the modules and record the location and the module information that is shown on the label This helps you when installing a new or replacement module in the future by allowing you to order the replacement parts without disturbing the system Check the coding pegs on the termination assembly and verify that they match the sockets on the back of the I O module see page 122 Verify that the slot on the head of the module clamp screw is vertical see page 122 Place the new module on to the dowel pin on the I O base unit see page 123 Push the module in until the connectors are fully mated 32069M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 The status indicators listed in Table 14 illuminate depending on which module you are installing The table
91. 2 C PtT hreshold 0 RemoteSen 2 C PtT hreshold 0 IndeterminateD fF alling HE EH RemoteScn 2 C PtThreshold D IndeterminateO ffRising 44 E RemoteS cn 2 C PtT hreshold 0 OffO penF alling ss RemoteSen 2 C PtT hreshold 0 OffO penRising EH RemoteScn 2 C PtThreshold O OnlndeterminateF alling a E RemoteS cn 2 C PtThreshold 0 OnlndeterminateRising Indicates An ss RemoteS cn 2 C PtT hreshold 0 S hortO nF alling On ES Condition RemoteScn 2 C PtT hreshold 0 Short nRising Based on these settings if the switch is closed the input reports an on condition anytime the voltage is above 14 5V but does not report a short circuit because there is no way to get the voltage to rise to 32V The same is true with an off condition The module reports an off condition anytime the voltage is below 5 5V but does not report a wire off because it has to go below 0V to do so 278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Appendix B Custom Diagnostics Configuration For custom diagnostics you calculate and enter the threshold values To calculate the desired values see Calculate Threshold and Resistor Values on page 280 Once calculated follow these steps to enter the settings 1 From the Diagnostics pull down menu choose Custom 2 Click Ed
92. 2015 325 Index 326 IP address assign 125 DHCP BOOTB 28 obtaining 28 primary 27 IP address swap 27 adapter 175 isolated analog 1 0 module 155 K keying module 116 117 L latch limit alarms 208 latch rate alarms 208 latching diagnostic 149 layout hardware 20 System 19 limits configuration tab 207 line monitoring 213 1715 digital output modules 221 listen only connection 176 locking screw 124 M MAC address 126 mean time to repair MTTR 217 Mean Time to Restoration 307 MTTR 307 mixed architecture 25 mode fault 208 module coding pegs 117 data format 160 defintion dialog box 189 fault reporting digital module 142 info A tab 178 info Btab 179 inhibit RSLogix 5000 programming software 159 keying 116 117 operating modes 160 placement 65 polarization 116 positioning 18 properties 171 210 resolution 160 scaling 160 module A module B 29 module B module A 29 module configuration 130 MTTR mean time to repair 217 multicast 152 153 network tab 183 0 operating modes analog 1 0 module 161 output data echo 147 output fault state 147 overview System 15 P partner 1 0 module 17 parts list 46 performance criteria analog input module 157 analog output module 158 PES programmable electronic systems 211 PFD Probability of Failure on Demand PFD 293 PFH probability of failure 293 probability of failure per hour 293 polarization module 116 port configuration 182 power
93. 22 fail safe state 1715 modules 225 fault bit 148 field 260 mode 208 value 208 fault reporting 153 standard input modules 152 fault program action tab 197 208 faults 1715 analog output module 222 1715 digital output modules 221 1715 input modules 219 features 1715 IB16D 138 1715 IF16 156 1715 0F8l 157 digital module 140 ferrites expansion cable 80 field fault 260 Wire connection 89 field loop circuits analog input module 107 digital inputs 97 digital output module 104 Index field wire analog input module 109 analog output module 112 digital output module 101 format connection datat 32 fuse termination assembly 57 58 59 261 fusing 148 nondiagnostic output modules 148 G general tab 188 193 199 204 ground connection wire 88 wire 88 hardware layout 20 heating and cooling requirements 63 high damp limit 207 hold last state 221 1 0 base 66 1715 A3I0 55 75 install 74 1 0 configuration folder 210 1 0 expansion cable install 80 1 0 module 17 51 Add on Profile 164 install 131 partner 17 RPI 32 termination assembly 56 IEC 61508 294 indicators 141 inhibit module 142 input module compatibility 140 install 1715 AENTR 121 adapter 121 adapter base 74 expansion cable 82 1 0 base 74 1 0 expansion cable 80 1 0 module 131 power supply 73 slot cover 134 termination assembly 77 instrument ground 88 Internet protocol tab 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September
94. 24 mA 16 Channel 1715 OF8l Analog Output Module 18 32 260 Output 18 32Vdc 0 8 Channel 20mA 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module 18 32 165 Output 18 32Vdc 0 5A Pilot Duty 16VA 1 5A Inrush 1715 TASIB16D Termination Assembly 0 32 6 5 16 Channel Simplex Digital Input TA 1715 TADIB16D Termination Assembly 0 32 6 5 16 Channel Dual Digital Input TA 1715 TASIF16 Termination Assembly 18 32 0 24 16 Channel Simplex Analog Input 1715 TADIF16 Termination Assembly 18 32 0 24 16 Channel Dual Analogue Input Termination Assembly 18 32 500 x 1715 TASOB8DE 8 Channel Simplex Digital Output Termination Assembly 18 32 500 1715 TADOB8DE 8 Channel Dual Digital Output Termination Assembly 18 32 0 24 1715 TASOF8 8 Channel Simplex Analog Output Termination Assembly 18 32 0 24 Model 1715 A2A Dual Processor Backplane is for use with Model 1715 AENTR Processor Model 1715 A3IO I O Backplane is for use with all other Models Subject devices are all marked Ex nA IIC T4 Gc 42 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Conditions of Certification Model 1715 AENTR The ambient temperature range is 25 C to 60 C All other Models The ambient temperature range is 25 C to 70 C Subject devices are to be installed in an IECEx Certified IP54 tool accessible enclosure that has been evaluated to the requirements of IEC 60079 0 Ed 6 an
95. 5 79E 06 3 62E 06 MTTR 10 Hours PTI 1 0 Years Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration E 85 Fa 3 u 3 ec e S s ec X 7 o EE E 3 3 5 8 E 5 j amp 8 8 lee e 2G a 1715 A Ethernet AENTR adapter S a 5 g nod 8 18 8 8 module fae aR ees S c 1715 A 16 1B16D channel digital eS J 2 S a lS input amp g 8 8 g 8 8 module ho fa 2 pele T 2 N 1715 A 16 IF16 channel sien 2 F e 83 S input 88 E 8 g module 2 8 a 2 eem T N 1715 A 8 OB8DE channel digital 2 s 2 output g la i 2 i d e module eS 2 S BG we a m 1715 A 8 OF8l channel analog 3 s S output P i 2 d module 2 23 S S Je A S 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 295 Energize to action 1 year Proof Test Interval PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Table 61 Energize to action 1 year Proof Test Interval Appendix D us 8073 04 60 3881 60 3881 60 3CCl 60 399 pay cool azoo azoo C001 cool 204d 10 3084 10 38 v 10 38v Y 10 39Lv 90 309 9Hid 60 306 0L 3cC8 0L 3CC8 60 1v9 60 JECE 70 300 L L0 306 L L0 306 L L0 4 6 2 70 320 7 Duplex Configuration cO 4dS7 L LO ISE C LOISET TO ISUL T0 486 7 9601 9680 9650 0 L 5 0 0 L 0 L 0 L 0 L 0 L Y N LO JEE E LO JEEE LO 3vLV L0 3LC8 V N
96. 5 aa e js 3 input R S N o c E IN us m JA ES a S module val iz o o IR e S fH 7 IX pe s S Mo nd o c y N mad ce Mo s s N N 1715 A 2 001 8 channel PE N OB8DE digital 2 2 s2 e e 5 a a E 5 wit jg J e 2 la la lg lt lz 8 a module a ma dE TA ke Jere gS Se Ve Se eas NR 1715 A 2 001 8 channel z OF8l analog e P 2 8 S S 8 S E 7 7 viyy 8 jg amp J BS 2 le E ls ls 8 l g module in x CBE ee iom Dee AS ems Dem e m S eem Dese I em es Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 299 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Appendix D Energize to action 5 year Proof Test Interval Table 67 Energize to action 5 year Proof Test Interval Salas ON 3e cc 1 1 E 1 i w fa Doo wa us ER RS RE R8 KE uis 9033 07 603891 60 3881 60 3CCL 60 3906 pay azoo qz00L qzooL 2001 2001 edid 90 3 903177 90 3177 903 61 S0 30 1 g e 5 edad 6031LS Ol 3cc8 Ol 3CC8 6o asc e 60318 El t S 11H L L L L L E amp 263 co 309v Lo 38r s L04 38pS zo a6S e c043176 299 20 358 9 LO HIEL Z LOFIELZ zo aee s o43erl pd 0 L 9660 9660 960 9660 g 98071 9801 0 L 0 L us WN oaeee z03c LO IvL y 203 78 2 S addd W
97. 6 RM001 Describes the guidelines for using ControlLogix controllers ina SIL 2 safety application Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system Product Certifications website http www ab com Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Chapter 1 Redundancy System Overview The 1715 Redundant I O System lets a ControlLogix controller communicate to a remote redundant I O chassis by using EtherNet IP The 1715 Redundant I O system provides fault tolerance and redundancy for critical processes by using a redundant adapter pair and multiple I O modules that have diagnostics and are easily replaceable The modular architecture lets you build and adapt a system to suit the specific needs of an installation The architecture lets you choose from different levels of adapter and I O fault protection The 1715 Redundant I O System consists of a two slot adapter base unit that houses a redundant adapter pair The adapter base unit is connected to up to eight I O base units which
98. 715 TADIB16D Digital input duplex 1715 TASOB8DE Digital output simplex 1715 OB8DE 8 channel digital output module 1715 TADOB8DE Digital output duplex 1715 TASIF16 Analog input simplex 1715 IF 16 16 channel analog input module 1715 TADIF16 Analog input duplex 1715 TASOF8 Analog output simplex 1715 0F8l l 8 channel analog output module 1715 TADOF8 Analog output duplex 1715 A2A N A Adapter base unit N A 1715 A3I0 N A 1 0 module base unit N A 1715 N2T N A Tall slot filler cover N A 1715 N2S N A Short slot filler cover N A 1715 2 Expansion cable 2 m N A 1 1715 1 0 module firmware is displayed as the same level ofthe firmware ofthe 17156 AENTR module regardless of the actual firmware level in the 1715 1 0 module See the latest certifications for software and firmware at http www rockwellautomation com See the TUV website at http www tuvasi com for SIL 2 certification listings All I O modules include line monitoring capability We recommend that you use line monitoring for safety related I O Safety related I O refers to an annunciator being available to an input or output that is attached to a field device For energize to action normally de energized I O you must enable line monitoring Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 213 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Typical Configurations The 1715 system supports single module configurations where it is accept
99. 756 ControlNet Bridge Redundant Media Allen Bradley 1756 DHRIO B 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 DHRIO C 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 DHRIO D 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 DNB 1756 DeviceNet Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 EN2F 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Fiber Media Allen Bradley 1756 EN2T 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley 1756 EN2TR 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge 2 Port Twisted Pair Allen Bradley 1756 EN3TR 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge 2 Port Twisted Pair Allen Bradley 1756 ENBT 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley 1756 ENET A 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface Allen Bradley 1756 ENET B 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface Allen Bradley b Find Add Favorite Favorites e em 2 Expand the Communications list select the 1756 EN2TR module and click OK The Module Properties dialog box appears New Module 39 xj General Connection Time Sync Module Info Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network RSNetwors 1756 EN2TR 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge 2 Port T wisted Pair Media Ethernet Address C Private Network 182 168 1 E IP Address 88 94 gd C Host Name 10 Type Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name cx E themet module en2tr Description u M Module Definition Change Revision a Electronic
100. 9080 9660 0 L 50 0 L 9607L 960 L 960 L 960 V N 10 3 0 3e LO 3vEY 10 3 C8 S0 3C L S0 3C l S0 3CV 8 10 380 Y 6031Ul 60 3LUL 60 3 9 8 80 39 V V N 103v 68 103r 8 COTIEET CO 4L0 9 SS E6 0E 66 960 66 9619 6 9ocv 6 10 368 Y L0 3VvV L 10 3vV L LO TESE L0 3L Y 8073 91 60 320 L 60 320 L 60 3 9 8 80 3c 1073 01 1073881 10 388 L0 3CCl 10 396 6 L8 L6L SES E L6L SES E 80 9 6 6LL Ovv G uondipsaq FERE HE iH HIE FEE uoisiag z z z eremuun S S S ci EX seuas lt lt lt lt lt AE 4S Do A n N13 2 2 oa Re ns RS Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 304 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Appendix D The PFD calculations in Table 72 are calculated for a 5 year proof test interval 43 800 hours and are specific to1715 I O components in ControlLogix systems De energize to trip 5 year Proof Test Interval Table 72 De energize to trip 5 year Proof Test Interval MTTR 24 Hours PTI 5 0 Years Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration z 2 ls sc E 3 5 ec Ss 2 zs3 Z amp a 1715 A 2 001 Ethernet AENTR adapter a 2 2 dual m m a di module gJ S SH 1715 A 2 001 16 channel 1B16D digital 2 E 2 input e e e lg module x E d 1715 A 2 001 16 channel IF16 analog 2 E a input E d a d module E T
101. Bradley DIGITAL OUTPUT 1715 OB8DE Allen Bradley ANALOG INPUT 1715 IF16 Allen Bradley ANALOG OUTPUT 1715 OF8l Allen Bradley Healthy Ready Run Healthy Ready Run Healthy Ready Run Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 af Healthy Ready Run Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 at Channel 08 Channel 09 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 af P af Channel 08 Channel 09 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 o o e e e e e e e e e e Q Q Q Q o Q Q O Q Q Q Q Q Q Q O 32092 M 32090 M 32091 M 32089 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 51 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 1715 A2A Adapter Base Unit The adapter base unit holds a pair of adapters 32060M Adapter Base Unit Fuses The 1715 A2A adapter base unit contains four fuses To replace the fuses follow this procedure 1 Lift the door to access the fuses The fuses are labeled from F1 F4 from left to right The replacement fuse part number is Littelfuse 0154004 DRT 52 Rockwell Automation Publication
102. COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs The table describes the two ways a module sends data to the owner controller Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 143 Chapter 3 144 Digital 1 0 Operation Topic Description Requested packet interval A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer Change of state Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On The data is sent at the RPI rate when there is no change of state By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Set RPI The Connection tab on the Module Properties dialog box lets you enter a requested packet interval RPI The RPI guarantees the slowest rate at which data is multicast to the owner controller The actual data transfer rate of the module can be faster than the RPI setting But the RPI provides a defined maximum period when data is transferred to the owner controller E Module Properties Adapter_Module 4 1715 IB16D 1 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Requested Packet Interval RPI 60 ms 60 0 750 0 Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Use Unicast Con
103. ControlLogix Digital I O Modules publication 1756 UMO58 Termination Assemblies There are two types of termination assemblies for the digital output modules The application of your system determines which termination assembly you need e 1715 TASOB8DE 8 channel digital output simplex termination assembly e 1715 TADOB8DE 8 channel digital output duplex termination assembly The following features are common to all 1715 digital I O modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All 1715 digital I O modules can be inserted and removed from the I O base unit while power is applied This feature lets you have greater availability of the overall control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 141 Chapter 3 142 Digital 1 0 Operation Module Fault Reporting 1715 digital I O modules provide hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred The status indicator of each module and the Logix Designer application graphically displays this fault and includes a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature lets you determine how your module has been affected and what action must be taken to resume normal operation Fully Software Configurable The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application uses a custom easily understood interface to wri
104. ControlLogix L7 controllers are certified in RSLogix 5000 version 20 or later for SIL 2 operations See the latest certifications for software and firmware at http www rockwellautomation com See the T V website at http www tuvasi com for SIL 2 certification listings Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 13 Preface Additional Resources 14 These documents contain additional information that is related to products from Rockwell Automation Resource 1715 Redundant 1 0 System Technical Specifications publication 1715 TD001 EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems publication ENET UMOO1 Description Provides technical specifications for components of the 1715 Redundant 1 0 System Describes how you can use EtherNet IP modules with your Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System publication 1756 UM535 Provides design and configuration information for a ControlLogix Redundancy System ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules User Manual publication 1756 UM058 ControlLogix Analog 1 0 Modules User Manual publication 1756 UM009 Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules Describes how to install configure and troubleshoot ControlLogix analog 1 0 modules Using ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference Manual publication 175
105. ControlLogix controller which conveys system I O data Figure 13 1715 AENTR Adapter 1715 AENTR Redundant ADAPTER Adapter Pair 1715 AENTR Allen Bradley ADAPTER ADAPTER 1715 AENTR 1715 AENTR Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Module Status Module Status Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Network Status Network Status Rack Status Rack Status Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 02 00000000 000 TTT 368 b Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 at g Vo not open this module door or plug or insert anything into the port 32096 M IMPORTANT Donotopenthis module door or plug or insert anything into the port behind the module door unless instructed to do so by technical support 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 1715 Digital and Analog 1 0 Modules Your system can be configured with any combination of I O modules and in either Simplex or Duplex mode These I O modules can be included in your system 1715 IB16D 16 channel digital input module 1715 OB8DE 8 channel digital output module 1715 IF16 16 channel analog input module 1715 OF81I 8 channel analog output module Figure 14 1715 Digital and Analog I 0 Modules 1715 IB16D 16 channel Digital Input 1715 OB8DE 8 channel Digital 1715 IF16 16 channel Analog Input 1715 0F8I8 8 channel Analog Output Module Output Module Module Module DIGITAL INPUT 1715 IB16D Allen
106. Controller Communication Module COM 2 Safety Input Connection 4 Safety Output Connection 1 Safety Input Reaction Time Limit Reaction Time Limit 5 Safety Output Module Delay Module Delay CIP Safety Network The Logix System Reaction Time for any simple input to logic to output chain consists of these five components 1 Safety input module reaction time plus input delay time 2 Safety Input Connection Reaction Time Limit Read from the Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software 3 Safety Task Period plus Safety Task Watchdog time 4 Safety Output Connection Reaction Time Limit Read from the Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software S Safety output module reaction time Configu ring the SIL 2 Task This SIL 2 task is a periodic task with priority 1 See the Using ControlLogix Period and Watchdo g SIL 2 Applications Reference Manual publication 1756 RMO001 SIL Task Program Instructions The user application must contain one SIL task that is composed of programs and routines The SIL 2 task must be the top priority task of the controller and the user defined watchdog must be set to accommodate the SIL 2 task IMPORTANT Motion related functions are not allowed and must not be used 230 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 IMPORTANT You must dedicate a specific task for safety related functions and s
107. DOTA Field Wiring CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7 Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0 5 Nem 0 37 Ibeft to the terminal screws The 24V DC field voltages VFIELD 1 and VFIELD 2 used by the output module for the output field voltages are connected at the terminal blocks and fed via two replaceable 10 A fuses F1 and F2 These fuses give protection for the output module against field faults Field OV VFIELD RTN is also routed from the output module connectors to the terminal block Figure 40 1715 TASOB8DE Digital Output Simplex Termination Assembly Connections F1 VFIELD1 24V DCO A9 F2 VFIELD2 24V DCC Digital Output Module Fail Safe Channel Array Q DO CHO Q DOCHI Q pocm G DO CH3 S DOCH4 Q DOCHS S DOCH6 VFIELD RTN OV i MM AA PEN E SOA PE I E AARE NE ENA AEA EE 32103 M DO Simplex Output Connections 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Figure 41 1715 TADOB8DE Digital Output Duplex Termination Assembly Connections vri pii Use 424V pc c i Fuse F2 VFIELD2 42V DC i Y Connector J1 Connector J2 Digital Output Digital Output Fail Safe Channel Fail Safe Channel Array Array DO Module DO Module LAN aN TaN aN aN
108. DS Piles desi eov Wa eas poe ee nee eee eae OES 166 Create the Project in RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer 167 Step 1 Create the New Project decia deer ad earn been gae 167 Step 2 Configure the Controller in the RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer Project 22745 Sinas ASH E nh as Need aene 169 Step 3 Add a 1756 EN2TR Module to the Project 170 Add the 1715 AENTR Adapter to the I O Configuration Tree 173 Step 1 Configure the Adapter for the EtherNet IP Network 173 Options for Setting the IP Addresses of 1715 AENTR Modules 173 Ethernet Network vues euaau dir teet ae VENE Ra bias 173 Step 2 Add the 1715 AENTR Adapter to the Project 174 Obtaining System Status i or ire pano dna des oes MU IE teed 184 Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module to the Project 186 Step 1 Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module in Duplex Mode 187 Step 2 Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module in Simplex Mode 192 Add a1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module to the Project 194 Step 1 Add a 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module in Duplex Mode 195 Step 2 Adda 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module in Simplex Mode 198 Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module to the Project 200 Step 1 Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module in Duplex Mode 200 Step 2 Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module in Simplex Mode 203 Adda 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module to the Project 204 8 Rockwell Automation Pub
109. H12CH13CH14CH15 O OV OV CHI CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 w O TE J 3 HHH BRP ERE L L1 e LM Lo mw Cw use Cover Polarization Pins Polarization o Pins O 32095 32120M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 95 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Figure 35 Connections to 1715 TASIB16D Simplex Nonisolated Digital Input 16 channel Termination Assembly 32115M Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0 5 Nem 0 37 lbeft to the terminal Screws Figure 36 Connections to 1715 TADIB16D Duplex Digital Input 16 channel Termination Assembly CHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH1 1 CH12CH13 CH14 CH15 CHOHCH1 HCH2 HCH3 CH4HCH5 CH6HCH7 CH8HCH9 CH10 H11 H12 H13 H144H15 32110 M Apply a minimum tightening torque of 0 5 Nem 0 37 Ibeft to the terminal Screws 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Digital Input Slew Tolerance It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal input voltage slewing that channels can be declared faulted as a consequence of diagnostics that are otherwise designed to ensure the channels are operating within their d
110. H15 Channel Fuse Fuse Holder Fi LO ae Fuse Cover Polarizing Pins e Wr d Polarizing Pins 45238 32120M 9 Analog Input Slew Tolerance It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal input current slewing that channels can be declared faulted as a consequence of diagnostics that are otherwise designed to ensure the channels are operating within their designed safety accuracy To avoid spurious declaration of channel faults it is necessary to ensure that the input signal condition satisfies the maximum slew rate criteria that are defined in the 1715 Redundant I O System Specifications Technical Data publication 1715 T D001 So it can be necessary to condition the input signal such as by filtering or sensor slew rate configuration 110 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Analog Input Module Field Devices If there are two field devices you normally connect them to two channels of a fault tolerant pair of modules for example to channel 0 and to channel 1 The two input values 0 and 1 then must be voted by using logic or a function block in the application program This is accomplished by taking either the lowest or highest value depending on the application The other option is to use the two values in two simplex input modules for example both using channel 0 In this case
111. Keying Compatible Module Connection Mone Time Sync Connection Mone Slot a Status Creating Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Cancel Help 171 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System 172 3 Name the module enter the IP address enter the Slot number we chose 1 for this example Click Change 5 Choose your Electronic Keying method see Electronic Keying on page 120 6 Click OK 7 To complete configuration of the 1756 Ethernet module refer to the EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UM001 The I O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this Controller Redundant IO System Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler 3 6 Tasks E e MainTask El CS MainProgram Unscheduled Programs Phases 3 6 Motion Groups E Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions Data Types CR User Defined iz Ca Strings Ga Add On Defined tH Ca Predefined Cj Module Defined Trends 3 6 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fs 0 1756 L61 Redundant IO System El g 1 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr zm Ethernet IMPORTANT The previous ControlLogix Controller Organizer Tree shows a 1756 EN2TR module The 1756 EN2TR can be used in Star using only one port Device Level or Linear ring topologies or you can use a 1756 EN2T module instead
112. M001D EN P September 2015 Table 74 Input 1 0 Tag Definitions Appendix F Tag Name Data Type Definition CIPLostPackets DINT Total of all CIP packets TCP Connections DINT Total of all TCP connections CUPUtilization DINT Echo of Connection Manager object CPU_Utilization attribute 1715 IB16D Table 75 16 channel Digital Input Simplex This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715 IB16D module Tag Name Data Type Definition Fault DINT Binary Module fault bit 0 when a module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no module is present no Logix connection exists or reported data is valid Data INT Input state one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Off de energized 1 On energized Status DINT bit field Redundancy and power status Bit Name Description 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or module faulted failed PtFault INT Channel fault status one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Normal 1 Channel is faulted failed Open Wire INT Open wire diagnostic status one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Normal 1 Indicates open wire detected ShortCircuit INT Short circuit diagnostic status one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Normal 1 Indicates short circuit detected Indeterminate INT Indeterminate diagnostic status one channel per channel for channels 0 15 Table 76 16 channel Digital Input Duplex Tag
113. MPORTANT Make sure that the SIL 2 task period allows enough time for the SIL 2 task including the Add On Instructions to complete Adjusting the period time above the suggested value can be needed if many 1715 modules are used as this adds more Add On Instructions Any increase to the safety task period impacts the safety reaction time See Worst Case Reaction Time Calculations on page 251 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 241 Chapter Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules 2 Set the priority to 1 3 Set the Task Watchdog based on the following a How long it takes to run the SIL 2 code see AOI Scan Times on page 250 a How small the task watchdog must be to help ensure that safety reaction times are met see Safety Reaction Time Calculations on page 250 If you do not have the information that is required to complete the watchdog time leave the default of 500 ms and adjust it later when you have more information New Task 38 Description Cancel Hep Type Periodic Petiod 30 ms Priority 1 gt Lower Number Yields Higher Prionty Watchdog 500 000 ms Disable Automatic Output Processing To Reduce Task Overhead Inhibit Task Click OK 4 5 Right click on the newly created task and choose New Program 6 Type a name for the program 7 Verify that it is scheduled in the SIL 2 task f New Program EE Nam
114. N SOILS S0 3 57 v03 E6l 70 324 e S Hdd WN 6 31LL 60 3LL L 603698 80 39 E a E 11H V N wu 9 WN ZO 3P9 L CO43P9 l ZO IEE S CO 3SH L das ss e6 960 66 960 66 901976 96 6 e PPX 703689 03Pvl Z0 3PFL zo aese zoak v a npy 80 3 91 60 320 L 60 3001 60 3698 90 37E E E sv 103 0L 103891 20 3881 Z03C CL 40 396 Jaw c 6 Le8 Lo cec e L6L SES E 907 96 eLV ovv G 5 ERES ES Em SES Bs2 525 5325 wndosq z 98 38 588 2 8 3 e uosa 9JEMULIH OF8I Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 300 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System PFD Calculations with 24 hour MTTR Appendix D The PFD calculations in Table 68 are calculated for a 1 year proof test interval 8760 hours and are specific to1715 I O components in ControlLogix systems De energize to trip 1 year Proof Test Interval Table 68 De energize to trip 1 year Proof Test Interval MTTR 24 Hours PTI 1 0 Years Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration o i i w s wv s Ss amp E v o o tf EY 3 a ec uw w a s ec S A p z24 u a a 2 BorE u 1715 A 2 001 Ethernet AENTR adapter S 5 a 5 2 dual T i a ua E x E Ia a e m module S 1S 2 2 Z 18 J la a4 S 1715 A 2 001 16 IB16D channel digital s 5 5 9 e 5 2
115. N For UL approved installations the 1715 OB8DE output power source must be isolating wired with a minimum of 0 75 mm 18 AWG wire and fused with a rating of 32V DC min 5 A max ATTENTION Do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single terminal ATTENTION This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 European Hazardous Location Approval The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94 9 EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079 15 and EN 60079 0 ATEX IECEx Certification Certificate number DEMKO 11 ATEX 7928686X I 3G Ex nA IICT4 Gc Certificate number IECEx UL 15 0032X Ex nA IICT4 Gc The ambient temperature range is 25 60 C 13 140 F for the 1715 AENTR and 25 70 C 13 158 F for all other models Essential Health and Safety Requirements Met by compliance with the standards EN 60079 0 2012 A11 2013 EN 60079 15 2010 and IEC 60079 0
116. Name Data Type DINT Binary Definition Module fault bit 0 Normal 1 Indicates indeterminate input voltage detected 0 when one module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no modules are present no Logix connection exists or reported data is invalid Data INT Input state one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Off de energized 1 On energized Status DINT bit field Redundancy and power status Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Description 311 AppendixF 1 0 Tag Definitions Table 76 16 channel Digital Input Duplex Tag Name Data Type Definition 0 ModAFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 1 ModBFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or module faulted failed 9 ModAGroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or module A faulted failed 10 ModBGroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or Module B faulted failed PtFault INT Channel fault status one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Normal 1 Channel is faulted failed Open Wire INT Open wire diagnostic status one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Normal 1 Indicates open wire detected ShortCircuit INT Short circuit diagnostic status one bit per channel for channels 0 15 0 Normal 1 Indicates short circuit detected Indeterminate INT Indeterminate diagnostic status one channe
117. Operation Chapter 3 IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters the Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs goes to zero 0 during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs go to zero 0 These examples are instances where you can use module inhibiting e You want to upgrade a digital I O module We recommend that you do the following a Inhibit the module b Perform the upgrade c Uninhibit the module e You are using a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet but you do not want the controller to look for a module that does not exist yet In this case you can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot Status Indicator Information Each 1715 digital I O module has a status indicator on the front of the module that lets you check the module health and operational status of a module The status indicator displays vary for each module See Appendix A 1715 Digital Input Module on page 246 for detailed status indicator information The features that are described in this section are available on 1715 digital input modules Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State Digital input modules always send data at the RPI but they send data only at a change of state if the COS feature is enabled
118. P September 2015 306 Appendix E SIL 2 Applications Checklist 17151 0 Modules The following checklist is required for planning programming and startup ofa SIL 2 certified system that uses 1715 I O modules It can be used as a planning guide and during proof testing If used as a planning guide the checklist can be saved as a record of the plan Checklist for 1715 1 0 Modules Company Site Loop definition No For SIL 2 Applications Fulfilled Comment Yes No 1 Are you using the SIL 2 certified 1715 modules only with the corresponding firmware release listed in Revision l Release List available from the Product Certification link at http www ab com for your safety application 2 Have all modules been installed in accordance with the instructions in this manual L L 3 Has a risk analysis been completed to determine the required SIL for your application L 4 Has fault detection time been specified C L 5 Where fault detection time is greater than the controller reaction time limit CRTL does the safety related 1 0 L L configuration provide a fail safe configuration 6 Has the safety related timing for each safety related function including CRTL and fault tolerance period been l established 7 Does the application program shut down the SIL 2 safety functions if a fault
119. Period SIL 2 Task Period 30 SIL 2 task period ControlLogix SIL2 Task Period SIL 2 Task Period 30 SIL 2 task period ControlLogix SIL2 Task Watchdog SIL 2 Task Watchdog 20 ControlLogix system runs input module AOI and controls requested em requested output in same SIL 2 task as 1715 SIL 2 AOls Add On Instruction Module RPI AOI Module RPI 2 30 Value that is entered into the AOI Module RPI parameter ControlLogix SIL2 Task Period SIL 2 Task Period 30 AOls are timer based input and output AOI timers can be asynchronous ControlLogix SIL2 Task Period SIL 2 Task Period 30 SIL 2 task period ControlLogix SIL2 Task Period SIL 2 Task Period 30 SIL 2 task period ControlLogix SIL2 Task Watchdog SIL 2 Task Watchdog 20 ControlLogix system runs output module Add On Instruction and places requested outputs in output module raw data Output Data to 1715 AENTR 1715 Output Module RPI 80 1715 AENTR Delay 25 1715 Backplane Rate 65 1715 Output Module Delay 15 If you are not using COS the worst case reaction time from input screw terminal to output screw terminal is equal to 210 ms plus the following Input RPI Output RPI Add On Instruction Module RPI 2 SIL 2 Task Period x 6 SIL 2 Task Watchdog x 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 251 Chapter 7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules If you are using COS the worst case reaction time from input screw terminal to output s
120. Port41 FullDuplex 0 Decimal BOOL A amp dapter Module 5 Port amp 2FullDuples 0 Decimal BOOL a Adapter_Module S PortB1FullDuplex U Decimal BOOL 4dapter_Module S PortB2FullDuplex 0 Decimal BOOL Adapter_Module S Port41Autonegotia 2 0000_0000 Binary SINT Adapter_Module S Port42Autonegotia 2 0000 0000 Binary SINT HE Adapter Module S PortBl amp utonegotia 290000 0000 Binary SINT Adapter_Module S PortB24utonegotia 2 0000_0000 Binary SINT Adapter Module PortA Speed 0 Decimal DINT H Adapter_Module 5 PortA25peed 0 Decimal DINT Fi Adapter Module S PortB Speed 0 Decimal DINT H Adapter_Module S PortB25peed 0 Decimal DINT FE Adapter Module S CIPTimeouts 2 0000 000 Binary DINT Adapter_Module S CIPConnections 2 0000 000 Binary DINT Fi Adapter Module ClPLostPackets 280000 000 Binary DINT Adapter_Module S T CPConnections 280000 000 Binary DINT 3 Locate the adapter status tag The adapter status tag name is followed by S 4 Expand the twisty for the adapter status tag to view the status information for the primary and secondary adapters Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Once the 1715 AENTR adapter is configured in the project you are ready to add Input Module to the Pr oj ect I O modules to the project In this section you do the following e Adda 1715 IB16D digital input module in Duplex mode to the project e Adda 1715 IB16D digital input module in Simplex mode to the project Dependin
121. PtFault SINT Channel fault status one bit per channel for channels 0 7 0 Normal 1 Pint is faulted failed NoLoad SINT No Load diagnostic status one bit per channel for channels 0 7 0 Normal 1 Indicates no load detected ShortCircuit SINT Short Circuit diagnostic status one bit per channel for 0 7 channels Table 79 8 channel Digital Output Duplex Input 0 Normal 1 Indicates short circuit detected Tag Name Data Type Definition Fault DINT Binary Module fault bit 0 when one module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no modules are present no Logix connection exists or reported data is invalid ReadBack SINT Output channel read back state one bit per channel for channels 0 7 0 Off de energized 1 On energized Status DINT bit field Redundancy and power status Bit Name Description 0 ModAFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 1 ModBFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or module faulted failed 9 ModAGroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or module A faulted failed 10 ModBGroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or Module B faulted failed PtFault SINT Channel fault status one bit per channel for channels 0 7 0 Normal 1 Pint is faulted failed NoLoad SINT No Load diagnostic status one bit per channel for channels 0 7 0 Normal 1 Indicates no load detected Rockwell Automation Public
122. Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Table 35 Configuration Parameters for the Analog Input Duplex Module Parameters Description Low Engineering Enter the Low Engineering value for the channel between 9999999 99999999 The default is 0 0 Low Signal and Low Engineering values are shown in pairs High Signal Enter the High Signal value for the channel between 0 0 20 0 mA The default is 20 0 mA This value must be greater than the Low Signal value High Signal and High Engineering values are shown in pairs High Engineering Enter the High Engineering value for the channel between 9999999 99999999 The default is 100 0 High Signal and High Engineering values are shown in pairs 9 Click OK Step 2 Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module in Simplex Mode Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input module in Simplex mode to the project 1 Add the new module see page 186 2 Select the 1715 IF16 module see step 2 on page 200 The General tab appears 31 Module Properties AENTR 4 1715 IF16 2 1 Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration 1715 F16 16 Channel Current Analog Input Allen Bradley TF 16analog Module A Slot 4 Module B Slot 5 See Figure on page 188 for General parameter settings 3 Click Change referring to Figure on page 201 for Module Definition parameter settings Ch
123. Range or Input Range is selected before continuing with the calibration check procedure The two general functions in the calibration check process are as follows e Attaching generating a Low Reference Signal e Attaching generating a High Reference Signal Verify that the physical values correspond to the module read produced values within desired tolerances If not consider replacement of the affected module 288 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Appendix C Reconfigure a Module Online Use Ladder Logic to If an I O module supports reconfiguration you can reconfigure the module via Reconfigure an 1 0 Module one of the following e Studio 5000 Logix Designer application e An MSG instruction in program logic IMPORTANT Consider these guidelines in SIL 2 applications e We recommend configuring SIL 2 safety applications offline Even if the Logix controller and RSLogix 5000 software permit online SIL 2 configuration that is module interface option changes import of the Add On Instructions and so forth a download to the processor is required e Enabling SIL 2 on spare modules while online is not supported e Where a module is used without SIL 2 enabled and SIL 2 is then enabled for that module a power cycle of the rack is required to force the new configuration to the module The same is true where a module is used with SIL 2 enabled and SIL 2 is then disabled for that module e Apr
124. S S 1715 A 2 001 8 channel OB8DE digital 2 2 2 output un En x E module EE m S Re 1715 A 2 001 8 channel OF8l analog a Pal a output d m a m module _ 2 S T Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 305 als 8073 04 60 3881 60 3881 60 3CCl 60 495 Energize to action 5 year Proof Test Interval PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Table 73 Energize to action 5 year Proof Test Interval Appendix D Way azoo qcooL QqcooL zool C00 9 11d 907308 90 3277 90 3277 90 1 0 7 0 39 l s S 9Hid 60 4LL S 01 3278 01 3278 60735 60 308 11H L L L L L ww E El E CO IDL Y 101 3889 107 3889 COTIELE 0071586 199 C0 66 9 LO JEL 6 LO JEL 6 cis 034 L pd 960 9660 9680 960 9660 d 0 L 0 L 0 L 0 L 9607L Ys V I LO JEF E LO JEF E LO 3v Y 20 3278 E S 204d 0 48L7 0 18 c 10 186 10 36v 4 a t S 9 Hid 60 3 9 8 E a S 13H v i 192 V I C0T8 l CO 8L L CO ILb S 0 34v l dis SS E6 960 66 960 66 9619 6 96Cv 6 e PPY 10 3687 LO 3vV L LO 3vV L LO JES E L0 3LL Y A npy 80 49 L 60 3201 60 320 L 60 3 9 8 80 30 amp Bi 101 011 20 3881 20 3881 L0 3cCl 10 395 381WN 6 Lv8 L6L SES E L6L SES E S802296 6LL Ovv G uondibsaq 3 E z E uoisian aemuay S N E sauas lt lt lt lt lt es as ho AB b onqey OB gt i gt E rs eS Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN
125. Short circuit and open circuit line monitoring is provided on all outputs In addition each output channel is tested and checked for stuck on and stuck off conditions on the output switch pairs Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Field Wiring of Digital Output Termination Assemblies The 1715 TASOB8DE and 1715 TADOBSDE consist of a simple PCB screw termination blocks 16 terminals two 10A fuses with a plastic fuse cover coding pegs field terminal connectors and connectors to connect the module to the command and response buses Figure 38 1715 TASOB8DE and 1715 TADOB8DE Digital Output Termination Assemblies 1715 TASOB8DE 1715 TADOB8DE Digital Output Simplex Digital Output Duplex Termination Assembly Termination Assembly Field Connections This Side Field Connections This Side 10 A Fuse 10 A Fuse Polarizing Pins Polarizing Pins 32093 M 32121M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 101 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Figure 39 Connections to 1715 TASOB8DE and 1715 TADOB8DE Digital Output Termination Assembly 8 channel Simplex Duplex V2 V1i ol ov ov Ps i ov TA V2 d if fitted 0 0X0 32105 M
126. TR adapter 17 50 add 173 Add on Profile 164 diagnostic features 255 install 121 IP address 173 1715 2 expansion cable 62 1715 IB16D 138 diagnostic features 255 digital input module 131 features 138 1715 IF16 156 analog input module 131 diagnostic features 256 features 156 termination assembly 157 1715 0B8DE diagnostic features 256 digital output module 131 1715 OF8I 156 analog output module 131 157 diagnostic features 256 features 157 1715 TADIF16 156 1715 TADOF8I 156 1715 TASIF16 156 1715 TASOF8I 156 1756 EN2TR add 170 5 year PFD calculations 295 297 299 A adapter 262 1715 AENTR 17 50 configure 173 cyclic trigger 31 Ethernet 115 install 121 IP address swap 175 RPI 32 SIL2 176 status indicators 262 topology 115 wire 86 adapter base 66 1715 A2A 52 74 install 74 Index add 1715 AENTR 173 1756 EN2TR 170 analog input module 200 analog output module 204 digital input module 186 digital output module 194 add on instructions 218 Add on Profile 1715 AENTR 164 1 0 module 164 alarms disable 208 latch limit 208 latch rate 208 analog 1 0 module 155 calibration drift checks 287 configuration 155 cyclic trigger 31 features 158 isolated 155 operating modes 161 shutdown states 162 analog input module 1715 IF16 131 add 200 field loop circuits 107 field wire 109 performance criteria 157 recommended circuits 106 simplex mode 203 status indicators 270 termination assembly 59 ana
127. User Manual Allen Bradley Redundant l 0 System Catalog Numbers 1715 AENTR 1715 IB16D 1715 OB8DE 1715 IF16 1715 OF8I Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation configuration and operation of this equipment before you install configure operate or maintain this product Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes laws and standards Activities including installation adjustments putting into service use assembly disassembly and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect
128. We recommend that you manually enter the MAC address Sometimes the settings of your personal computer can prevent you from obtaining MAC address requests from your BOOTP DHCP server Please check the documentation for your BOOTP DHCP server for more help The MAC address is found on the label on the front ofthe adapter backplane The top MAC address corresponds to the primary adapter in the leftmost slot 32060 M 126 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 T Ele Tools Help Request History Clear History Add to Relation List Ethernet Address MAC Hostname 113058 letwork Settings 1 Defaults SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 Q0 Relation List Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 New Delete Secondary DNS 0 0 0 90 Ethemet Addre Domain Name r Status Entries Unable to service BOOTP request from 00 00 BC 54 E2 FF a of 256 3 Click OK The Request History panel displays the hardware addresses of modules issuing BOOTP requests 4 Click New to type in the MAC address 53 BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 File Tools Help Request History Clear History Add to Relation List _Type IP Address Hostname 8 55 0 BOOTP 00 A0 EC 00 24 8C Relation List New elete En oo Enable DHC jj of HE Ethemet Address MAC Type IPAddress Hostname Descript
129. a write it notifies the secondary module of the data to write and which module to write it to At a synchronized point in time both adapters physically write to the I O The adapters negotiate which module is primary depending on the status of the system If the primary module is unable to perform its role for example if a fault occurs in the primary module then the secondary module becomes the new primary assuming the IP address of the primary module taking over the role of communication The primary module is the only module of the pair that produces data on the EtherNet IP network If there is a fault the IP address swapping between the primary module and the secondary module takes no longer than 20 ms from the time of the initiating fault The secondary module is the new primary and handles all communication Depending on the structure of your Ethernet configuration this time can be impacted This IP address swap is transparent to the user You can detect which module the primary module is by examining the Network status indicator near the top of each adapter On the primary adapter the Network status indicator is solid green on the secondary adapter the Network status indicator flashes green Once a swap occurs the new primary module remains the primary unless there isa good reason to swap over again If the B module becomes the primary module because you must replace the A module that is not enough cause to swap IP add
130. able to either stop the system or allow the signals corresponding to that module to change to their default fail safe state It also supports fault tolerant I O configurations where the system is required to continue operating in the event of a fault Fault tolerant systems have redundant modules that let the system continue operation in the presence of a fault The system fails safe if another fault occurs All configurations can be used for safety related applications Choose the appropriate configurations that are based on the fault tolerance requirements of your application DLR Topology Figure 59 Simplex DLR with a ControlLogix Controller SIL 2 ControlLogix Safety Loop oo ooo m m FM Actuator 1756 L72 f 756 EN2TR Sensor I j Acer m iw PF eZ ege eis uua amp Ij o H c st t HoNl iu a A Nfa PUER A Se REN RI SIS NS Lie SSE 1715 A2A 1715 A3IO 1715 A3IO J For duplex configurations a SIL 2 fault tolerant architecture has dual input dual adapter and dual output modules The input modules operate in 1002 1 out of 2 under no fault condition
131. about how to set threshold values for digital inputs See Appendix C Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 257 Chapter8 Redundant 1 0 System Diagnostics Notes 258 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Appendix A Status Indicators Topic Page 1715 Adapter 262 1715 Digital Input Module 266 1715 Digital Output Module 268 1715 Analog Input Module 270 1715 Analog Output Module 272 The front panel module status indicators report general status and fault status Faults can also be reported via the user application sourced from system variables or I O connection points Faults are classified as listed here e System faults e Module faults e Channel faults e Field Faults Faults Faults are described here System Faults If redundant adapters are fitted then the Rack Status indicator on both adapters simultaneously turns RED A system fault is indicated when a fault is detected on any module including the adapter or any channel When this type of fault occurs in the system the Rack Status indicator on the adapters turns red Module Faults A module fault is indicated when a detected fault is isolated to the hardware of a specific module The Module Status indicator turns RED on the faulty module and then the Rack Status indicator on the adapter turns RED It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal field voltage and or current slewing f
132. ackplane and for an 1 0 module on the mating termination assembly If a contact is damaged do not attempt to install the module 1 Inspect the connector pins 32085a M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 121 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 2 Inspect the identification labels on the sides of the adapters and record the location and the module information that is shown on the label This helps you when installing a new or replacement module in the future by allowing you to order the replacement parts without disturbing the system 3 Check the coding pegs on the termination assembly and verify that they match the sockets on the back of the adapter e OO O 32085 M 4 Verify that the slot on the head of the adapter clamp screw is vertical Al Unlocked Position 32084 M 122 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 5 Record the MAC addresses The MAC addresses are between slot 0 and 1 of the adapter base Every hardware component has its own unique MAC address This hardware address is affixed to the hardware on a label 6 Place the new module on to the dowel pin on the adapter base unit 32077M Connect To Dowel Pins 7 Push the adapter in until the dowel pin and connectors are fully mated Rockwel
133. agnostic data is made available by the Add On Instructions Reaction Times To determine the system reaction time of any control chain you must add up the reaction times of all of components of the safety chain System Reaction Time System Reaction Time Sensor Reaction Time Logix System Reaction Time Actuator Reaction Time Figure 63 System Reaction Time System Reaction Time 1 17 1 Sensor Reaction Input Reaction SafetyTask Output Reaction Actuator T Time pM ReactionTime Time Reaction Time l a Camel mcm Se Input Module Input Connection Safety Task Period Output Connection Output Module L Dela gt Reaction Time Limit gt T Reaction Time Limit gt Dela i 1 l safetyTaskWatchdog f L n oe o a o a o l ee SY L Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 229 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Logix System Reaction Time The following sections provide information on calculating the Logix System Reaction Time for a simple input logic output chain and for a more complex application using produced consumed safety tags in the logic chain Simple Input logic output Chain Figure 64 Logix System Worst case Reaction Time for Simple Input to Logic to Output 3 Safety Task Period Safety Task Watchdog GuardLogix
134. al amount of heat depends on the number of channels in use IMPORTANT Cooling by Convection For correct cooling of the equipment fit the base units in the vertical plane and orientate so the modules are upright with their ventilation slots at the top and bottom The 1715 AENTR adapter is open type equipment that is rated IP20 This provides protection against solid objects over 12 mm 0 47 in but does not provide protection against liquids Heating Requirements If enclosure is in colder environments temperatures must be kept at 20 C 4 F or above Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 63 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Specify an Enclosure An enclosure for the 1715 Redundant I O System must be designed for the specific environmental conditions that are present It must support the weight of the system provide mechanical protection and remove the heat that the system creates If the application of the adapter is not using existing power sources the power supply units can be placed inside the enclosure damaged by incorrect handling Label the exterior surface of the enclosure ATTENTION The modules contain static sensitive devices that can be to caution personnel to observe anti static precautions when handling the modules System Software Install this software for your 1715 Redundant I O System RSLogix 5000 programming software version 19 or later or Studio 5000 environmen
135. alog Digital Input 1 1715 IF16 Simplex 16 point Analog Input The digital module connections use change of state triggers and the adapter and analog module connections use cyclic triggers Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 31 Chapter 1 Cat No 1715 AENTR 1715 IB16D 1715 0B8DE 1715 IF16 1715 0F8l 32 Redundancy System Overview Minimum RPI 60 ms RPI The RPI you set specifies the maximum amount of time between data updates The 1715 modules support an RPI range of 60 750 ms Maximum RPI 750 ms Connection and Data Format Default RPI 180 ms 60 ms 60 ms 120 ms 120 ms The adapter and I O modules each support one data connection for input output data Listen Only connections are not supported Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions Topic Page Before You Begin 46 System Hardware Components 49 System Software 64 Module Placement 65 Install Summary 68 Product Dimensions 69 DIN Rail Assembly 70 Install the Power Supply 73 Install the Adapter Base Unit 74 Install the 1 0 Base Unit 74 Install Termination Assembly to 1 0 Base Unit 77 Mount 1 0 Expansion Cable 80 Wire the Adapter 86 Connect Field Wiring 89 Connect the Adapter to the Ethernet Network 115 Module Keying 116 Electronic Keying
136. ange Redundant to No to place the module in Simplex mode 5 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 203 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System The Verify Module Properties dialog box appears See page 193 6 Click Yes A new General tab appears showing only one slot as available The module is now in Simplex mode Connection Module Info Configuration 1715 IF 16 16 Channel Current Analog Input Allen Bradley Module Definition Revision 2 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Input Data Analog Only Data Format Float 7 Click the Connection tab see page 177 8 Click the Module Info A tab see page 178 9 Click the Configuration tab see page 202 10 Click OK The I O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this J I O Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 A10 fa 0 1756 L61 Redundant IO System 8 1 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr Ethernet g 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module 1715Redundant g 0 1715 AENTR 4 Adapter Module iE 2 1715 IB16D A Digital Input Module Duplex it 4 1715 IB16D A Digital Input Module Simplex it 5 1715 OB8DE A Digital Output Module Duplex it 7 1715 OB8DE 4 Digital Output Module Simplex f 8 1715 IF16 A Analog Input Duplex 10 1715 IF16 A Analog Input Simplex BJ 1756 EN2TR CLx Ethernet module en2tr
137. anne Channe Run 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 a Channel 08 Channel 09 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 32091 Indicator Description A Healthy general status display B Ready redundancy status indicator C Run network status indicator D Channel 0 7 8 15 channel status indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Status Indicators Appendix A Status indicators for the 1715 IF16 analog input module are shown in this table Table 56 Analog Input Module Status Indicators Indicator State Description Healthy Steady off No power Steady green Module operational The module has been configured and is operating without any faults Flashing green Standby The module has not been configured Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on the module Ready Steady off No power or no partner module present Steady green Synchronized Synchronized with partner module redundant operation Run Steady off No power no backplane communication No power or the module is not communicating over the backplane Steady green Connected The module has at least one established connection Flashing green No connections The module is communicating over the backplane but there are no established connections Channel 0 7 8 15 Steady off No signal no backplane communication There is no signal on t
138. apter Controller Digital Module Type Category Filters Module Type Vendor Filters Allen Bradley Cognex Corporation Endress Hauser FANUC Corporation Catalog Number 1557 1715 AENTR 1715 Ethemet A 1732b 12X4 12 Point Input 4 1732E 16CFG EtherNet IP 16 1732E 16CFG 16 Point 24V DC 1732E 16CFG 16 Point 24V DC 1732E 16CFG 16 Point 24V DC Allen Bradley 312 of 312 Module Types Found 7 Close on Create 2 Expand the Communications list select the 1715 AENTR module and click OK 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 The redundant Module Properties dialog box appears E New Module sl e e a os General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Network 1715 AENTR 1715 Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley EN2TR 1715 AENTRA D Private Network 192 168 1 Ethernet Address IP Address 10 88 94 8 Host name Module Definition Module A Slot 0 Module B Slot 1 Revision Electronic Keying Connection Redundant SIL2 Safety Chassis Size Add on Profile Help 3 Name the module enter the IP address The Slot numbers for the adapters are always 0 and 1 IMPORTANT When using IP a
139. arch 2014 Copyright 2015 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
140. ask A Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler 3 amp 3 i E New Task ni rf 3 3 iem es iles 2 Name the Task SIL 2 for example 3 Select the Type Periodic 1715 SIL 2 Periodic Task Period Configuration The following are recommendations to configure the periodic task period for SIL 2 applications Set the period to the minimum 1715 SIL 2 module RPI divided by 2 For example if the default RPIs are used Table 45 Module Default RPIs 1715 Module RPI Adapters 180 ms Digital modules 60 ms lowest Analog modules 120 ms 1 Make the period 60 2 30 ms IMPORTANT Al 1715SIL2 Add On Instructions have unique timer presets set to the module RPI 2 so each Add On Instruction processes packets at a rate that is based on its module RPI In Table 45 the AENTR only processes a packet at 180 2 90 ms every third task period The analog modules process a packet at 120 2 60 ms every other task period The Add On Instruction obtains the RPI from the RPI input parameter on the Add On Instruction which is why it is important to enter this value to match the actual module RPI e Although the timer preset within the Add On Instructions equals RPI 2 the periodic task rate affects the actual rate the Add On Instructions process packets and the periodic task scan time As these values get lower the timer resolution improves and packets are processed closer to the RPI 2 timer preset I
141. ate data types are now available in your project Figure 67 Data Types for 1715 IB16D Module with Duplex Configuration Controller Organizer 5 6 Data Types Bg cul User Defined io IB16D Duplex Reconciled Input Data M IB16D Duplex SIL2 UDT Fe Ep Strings E cu Add On Defined i CRC calculator i 1816D Duplex siL2 E Cg Predefined Import Add On Instructions to Upgraded Projects To upgrade a project with new Add On Instructions follow these steps 1 Upgrade the Add on Profiles to SIL 2 capable versions 2 Configure SIL 2 Yes in the module configuration and click Apply to create the required module defined data types 3 Import the new Add On Instructions iodi We recommend that your user application contains one SIL task that is reate a Periodic lask for der y PP k Wee F composed of programs and routines that contain all logic for the SIL 2 rate SIL 2 Safety Functions safety functions This task must be the top priority task of the controller and the user defined watchdog must be set to accommodate the SIL task This task must be separate from all logic for the non SIL 2 rated functions 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Follow these steps to create the SIL 2 periodic task 1 In the Controller Organizer right click the Tasks folder and choose New T
142. ation Type 1715 IB16D 16 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Input Allen Bradley AENTR ibi6d Module A Slot 2 v Module BSlot 3 T 4 Verify Redundant is Yes for Duplex mode Note the additional module slot on the Module Properties dialog box TIP See Online Help in the application for more information on how to set Module Definition parameters 5 Click OK 6 Click the Connection tab The Connection tab appears See page 177 7 Click the Module Info A tab The Module Info A tab appears 190 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 See page178 for a definition of parameters on the Module Info A tab 8 Click the Module Info B tab The Module Info B tab appears You set the parameters for Module B the same way as Module A See page 178 9 Click the Configuration tab T Module Properties AENTR 2 1715 IB16D 2 1 Sra General Connection Module info A Module Info B Configuration Enable Change of State Off On gt Viv M Custom Thresholds 0 Y v Full v v 1 v M Full m v v 2 Fl v Full nd V yj E 3 v v Full E v v 4 V v Full l v v 5 v v f el V v 6 4 v Full v v T V v Full
143. ation Refresh communication This link appears when communication with the module has failed Click Refresh communication to attempt to restart communication with the module Set After you modify the Auto Negotiate state of the port Selected Speed or Selected Duplex configuration values a reset module message displays if the module must be reset before the modifications take effect Clicking reset module initiates a reset operation on the module which returns the module to its power up state by emulating the cycling of power The Reset Operation also causes the changes that are made to Auto Negotiate Selected Speed and Selected Duplex to become the current settings of the port 11 Click the Network tab The Network tab appears rrrrfPcrNam m x General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Network Topology Network Status communication Status Creating Cancel Help Table 28 Network Parameters Parameters Description Network Topology Displays the current network topology as either Linear Star or Ring Network Status Displays the current network status as Normal Ring Fault or Unexpected Loop Detected This link appears when communication with the module has failed Click Refresh communication to attempt to restart communication with the module Refresh communication 12 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication
144. ation Run Steady off No power no backplane communication No power or the module is not communicating over the backplane Steady green Connected The module has at least one established Channel 0 7 8 15 connection Flashing green No connections The module is communicating over the backplane but there are no established connections Steady off Off de energized no backplane communication The channel is off de energized or the module is not communicating over the 1 0 backplane Steady amber On energized The channel is on energized Flashing amber Field fault A field fault has been detected on this channel Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on this channel Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 267 AppendixA Status Indicators 1715 Digital Output Module 268 The digital output module has these status indicators DIGITAL OUTPUT 1715 OB8DE Allen Bradley Healthy Ready Run Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 at onw L o O O o O O O O 32090 Indicator Description A Healthy general status display Ready redundancy status indicator C Run network status indicator D Channel 0 7 channel status indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Status Indicators Appendix A Status indicators for the 1715 OB8DE digi
145. ation 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 313 AppendixF 1 0 Tag Definitions Table 79 8 channel Digital Output Duplex Input Tag Name ShortCircuit E 1715 IF16 Table 80 16 channel Analog Input Simplex Input Data Type SINT Definition Short Circuit diagnostic status one bit per channel for 0 7 channels 0 Normal 1 Indicates short circuit detected This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715 IF16 module Fault DINT Binary Module fault bit 0 when one module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no modules are present no Logix connection exists or reported data is invalid ChSimplex 0 15 Array of structure Array of 16 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0 15 Data REAL Input data status Faults DINT bit field Channel fault status Bit Name Description 0 Fault 0 Good 1 Circuit fault for this channel 3 Underrange 0 Good 1 Underrange detected 4 Overrange 0 Good 1 Overrange detected RollingTimestamp INT Timestamp data Status DINT bit field Bit Name Description 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel on the module is faulted failed Table 81 16 channel Analog Input Duplex Input Tag Name Data Type Definition Fault DINT Binary Module fault bit 0 when one module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no modules are present no Logix connection exits or reported data is invalid ChSimplex
146. ble for use in this system depending on your needs I O modules can be used singly or in pairs providing configuration in either Simplex or Duplex modes Table 1 lists the 1715 modules that can be used in this system Table 1 Modules Available for the 1715 Redundant 1 0 System Cat No Description 1715 AENTR x 2 A pair of Ethernet adapters 1715 IB16D A 16 channel digital input module 1715 0B8DE An 8 channel digital output module 1715 IF16 A 16 channel analog input module 1715 0F8l An 8 channel analog output module 1715 1 0 Modules in SIL 2 Applications With the inclusion of diagnostics for the CIP messaging channel the 1715 Redundant I O system can be used for SIL 2 safety applications For information about SIL 2 safety applications see Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 The 1715 Redundant I O System operates with a pair of 1715 AENTR adapters When designing your control system by using the 1715 Redundant I O System you can use digital and analog I O modules in one of these ways e One I O module in Simplex mode e One I O module with the option to add a second module e A pair of I O modules that work in Duplex mode You must decide the layout of your I O before building your system but you can add more I O at any time The use of termination assemblies communicates the I O mode of operation you choose Simplex or Duplex to your system through the backplane the adapter and I O base units Termination Assembli
147. blication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 163 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Install the Software Install the following software e RSLogix 5000 programming software version 19 or later or Studio 5000 environment version 21 or later e RSLinx Classic software version 2 57 or later Install the Add on Profiles You must install two Add on Profiles one for the adapters version 2 01 014 or later and one for each of the I O modules version 3 01 014 or later The four I O module Add on Profiles are contained in one file See the latest certifications for software and firmware at http www rockwellautomation com See the TUV website at http www tuvasi com for SIL 2 certification listings The Add on Profiles can be found in one of two ways e On the disk that came with your system e On the Product Compatibility and Download Center website e Once the Add on Profiles are installed on your computer they can be accessed through RSLogix 5000 software and or the Logix Designer application With the Add on Profiles you are able to do the following e Add and configure the redundant adapter pair e Add and configure I O modules in Simplex mode e Add and configure I O modules in Duplex mode e Monitor diagnostics for I O modules To install the Add on Profiles follow these steps IMPORTANT Make sure any instances of RSLogix 5000 programming software or Logix Designer application are shut down before beginnin
148. blication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 83 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 3 Insert an M3 nut into the base unit molding assembly as shown 32081M Secure the plug or socket assembly by inserting che two M3 socket cap screws 5 Tighten the screws with a 2 5 mm Allen wrench 6 Install the cable end into the plug or socket assembly and tighten the retaining screws by hand 7 Fit the cable plug or socket assembly to the other I O base unit and secure as in steps 3 and 4 8 Fit the other end of the cable into the cable plug or socket assembly 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Connect to a 1715 A2A 2 slot Adapter Base Unit 1 When installing the expansion cable from the right hand side insert a cable plug assembly into the 1715 A2A adapter base unit connector Extending from right hand side Cable Plug Assembly 443 Socket Cap Screw M3 Nut 32082 M 2 Follow steps 3 4 and 5 3 Insert the cable end into the cable plug assembly and tighten the retaining screws by hand 4 Fit the cable socket assembly to the I O base unit and secure as in steps 4 and 5 Fit the other end of the cable into the cable socket assembly yy gaa Connect cable plug assembly to the adapter base connector 4 Adapter Base C to v apter Base Connector a D A igs 32060 M N E J Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM
149. cation 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 149 Chapter3 Digital 1 0 Operation Follow these steps to enable diagnostic latch of information 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click che Configuration tab E New Module 2 Do one of the following e Check a checkbox to enable diagnostic latching for a specific point e Clear the checkbox to disable diagnostic latching for a specific point 3 Click OK 150 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 Shutdown State The output module shutdown state defines the behavior of the output module if communications to the module fail within the timeout period or if the processor is put into Program mode This occurs on a channel by channel basis These principles apply for the 1715 analog and digital output modules The shutdown state can be configured to these values e Oncenergize e Off de energize e Hold last state E Module Properties Local 1 1756 OA8 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel f Help During normal operation with an adapter present the state of the outputs can be configured when no connections from a Logix controller are active Analog output modules can be configured to OFF HOLD LAST
150. control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process Module Fault Reporting The 1715 analog I O modules provide hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module has a status fault indicator and the Logix Designer application graphically displays this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature lets you determine how your module has been affected and what action must be taken to resume normal operation 158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Fully Software Configurable The Logix Designer application uses a custom easily understood interface to write configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve e Vendor e Product Type e Product Code e Revision e Serial Number e Product Name By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable The keying options available with your 1715 analog I O are outlined in Chapter 2 Status Indicator Information Each 1715 analog I O module has status indicators on the front of the module that allow you to check the module health and opera
151. crew terminal is equal to 270 ms plus the following Output RPI Add On Instruction Module RPI 2 SIL 2 Task Period x 6 SIL 2 Task Watchdog x 2 Using the Add On Instruction The following illustrations provide basic examples of how the Data Ta gs inan Appli cation Requested Output Data tag and the Reconciled Input Data tag could be used in program logic Data is written to the requested output and read from the Prog ram reconciled input while the raw data in the module defined input and output tags is ignored Figure 68 Requested Output Data in Ladder Logic Example ABA Ness EXE SSH NDS SS SBS EDA SS Noserise eus oe et Se A eiae NM SHINE i wee es REETA TES SAS SER S JS gie SUS SERINE AE SS SER Ss A Sethe dues URIS i Nee ERT SNS ssh zy VES AES BAs SS SA ey NAST HCL e iM SMES TL AR S SNE 252 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Performing a SIL 2 Reset Valid SIL2 Data Update Received j Within CRTL Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 SIL 2 communication between a Logix controller and 1715 modules is achieved by the sender of the data encoding additional check data into the produced tag and the receiver of that tag by using that extra data and time to determine the data that is received is valid Data can travel in either direction that is CLX gt 1715 and 1715 gt CLX Each time the data passes the ch
152. ct the adapter to the Ethernet network 10 Module keying verify coding peg positions 11 Install the adapter redundant module pair 12 Install the I O modules 13 Install slot filler covers over unused slots Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Product Dimensions This section outlines the space requirements for your 1715 Redundant I O System DIN Rail Mounting Dimensions The system requires free space of at least 140 mm deep 5 51 in from front to back between the rear panel of an enclosure and the inside of an enclosure door IMPORTANT Allow sufficient free space around the base units Every installation needs space on at least three sides as follows e Space above to manipulate and install field wiring e Space below to enable modules to fit and to be able to grasp a module during removal e Space to the right to maneuver an 1 0 base unit during assembly or in the event of installing a new base unit IMPORTANT Minimum clearance between the product and the adjacent equipment must be 15 3 20 cm 6 0 8 0 in between chassis and a heat source and allow 5 1 cm 2 0 in between wireway and top or bottom of chassis DIN rail mounting is shown in the following figure
153. ction systems e PFHde Probability of failure per hour for de energize to action systems e PFHe Probability of failure per hour for energize to action systems Common Terms failure rate 1 MTBF A rate of safe failures Aq rate of dangerous failures Aq Mg Agg dangerous detected failure rate Ay x DC Aqu dangerous undetected failure rate hy x 1 DC SFF safe failure fraction A Nyq As M Ada TcE1001 channel equivalent down time Agy Ag x T4 2 MRT Agq Ag x MTTR DC diagnostic coverage 1001 Configuration STRi 991 Spurious Trip Rate A Agd PFD 991 Add Agu X Tee PFH 991 Adu 1002 Configuration STRi 992 Spurious Trip Rate 2 x Aga TGE1002 System equivalent down time Agu Aq x T 3 MRT Aggy Ag x MITR PFD4992 2x 1 Bp X m 1 8 X MP x Tee X Toe t Bp X Mq X MITR x dau X T 2 MRT PFH199 2 x 1 Bp x Aga 1 8 x Agul x 1 8 x Agu X Tee B x Mq 2002 Configuration PFD 992 2x du a Nad x Te PFH2902 2x Mu x Teg 1002D Configuration Tcp Qqux T1 2 MRT a Aga x MTTR Agu Add Aca TGE Ng X T1 3 MRT qg A a x MTTR gu Agd Aa PFD10020 2 x 1 B x M X 1 Bp X Agat 1 B x jy Aga X Tee X Tag Bp X gx MTTR B x Ayu X T1 2 MRT PFH1002D 2 x 1 8 x Mux 1 Bp X Aaa 1 8 Xy Aga XT B X Niu PFD and PFH values in
154. cuits for Analog Inputs 045 106 Recommended Wiring for Analog Output Modules 112 Connect the Adapter to the Ethernet Network L 115 Module Keying s cues hoeri rier Co ete ed e PERRO Res 116 Verify C ding DOES e stents eisene tut tpub ea tien 118 Electronic Keying codes atin cremi nities Oo netto e ad Raed 120 More Information cocer mao NERONE UN NERA Ko Rae P doge 120 Install the dap teres ono cai Sosa airs Send tastes iR Ree E DAE 121 Assignran IP Address ccert quide ner tree da aes 125 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features Table of Contents Step 1 Assign an IP Address on the BOOTP DHCP Server Step 2 Configure the Module with RSLinx Classic Software Install the I O Modules eee I Install Slot Filler Covers cece cence RR Remove Modules 0 c cece cece ccc ee Chapter 3 1715 Digital Module Overview s cocco oca waa e EET RS 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module sseeeesssse 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module 00008 Common Featuresis otc ces eee t ve Hu BENE EIS Determining Input Module Compatibility sueeue Termination Assemblies sese Determining Output Module Compatibility isse Termination Assemblies seen Using Features Common to 1715 S
155. cusses operating modes for the analog input and output modules Online Mode When fully online and operational each channel provides a regulated current over a 1 24 mA range for the analog input module and a 0 24 mA range for the analog output module The current values are set for each channel by the commanded values that are received from the running application The module indicators are GREEN and with all module indicators GREEN none of the channels are in the failed state however the channel indicators depend on the individual channel status In the online mode you can add a module to a group in a duplex TA or change a module in a pair with no impact on the reported channel values or deviation between the regulated current The unaffected module of a pair provides the full output values Offline Mode The module is in the Offline mode when it is installed but is not locked in position locking screw that is not engaged All channel outputs are off and the channel indicators are OFF The Healthy indicator is GREEN and the Ready indicator goes OFF while the Run indicator is RED The module enters the Shutdown mode when locked in position When a critical power fault is detected the module automatically enters the Shutdown mode and the Healthy indicator goes RED before it goes into Ready mode Shutdown Mode In the Shutdown mode all channels regulate their output to shutdown settings for each channel The Ready and Run
156. d Read Write External Access The tag can be controller or program scoped x Description n Cancel Help Usage Type Alias For Data Type OB8DE_Duplex_SIL2 s Scope fla MyStdProj X ami powe J Style JEN Constant Open Configuration Create a reset tag by using the default data type and Read Write External Access The tag can be controller or program scoped Choose the module configuration tag If you have multiple modules be sure to choose the configuration tag for the appropriate module Choose the module input tag If you have multiple modules be sure to choose the input tag for the appropriate module Create a tag for the Reconciled Input Data by using the default data type and Read Write External Access Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 The tag can be controller or program scoped OBSdeRECindata mmo d OB8DE Duplex Reconciled Inp Li 3 Open Configuration 7 Choose the module defined output tag If you have multiple modules be sure to choose the output tag for the appropriate module BSDE_Duplex_SIL2 Verity SIL2 check data is correct for incoming p OBS8DE_Duplex_SIL2 OB8DETag Data Valid Reset Reset2 Valid Data being rcvd oe Reset_Tiedown_Fautt Config Data my1715adptr 4 C CRC error
157. d IEC 60079 15 Ed 4 Enclosure is to be marked with the following Warning Do not open when energized After installation of subject devices into the enclosure access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected Subject devices are for use in an area of not more than pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664 1 Grounding conductor should have a minimum cross sectional area of 3 31 mm2 Subject devices are to use conductors with a minimum conductor temperature rating of 85 C Subject devices are to be installed in the vertical orientation only Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 43 Chapter 2 PP b IP Installation Instructions Multi point Network Communication Connections WARNING If you connect or disconnect the communication cable with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Field side Power WARNING If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field wire power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP Fuses WARNING If you insert or remove a base unit or termination assemb
158. d is 1 0 2 mA and not user configurable Reaction to Faults If an output module faults the following status information is reported Module presence Module health and status Channel health and status Field faults An echo of the front panel indicators for each module If any of the following internal conditions exist the output module fails safe An internal software error is detected A power feed combiner over temperature condition is detected 222 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Considerations for Sensor and Actuator Configurations Configure SIL 2 Operation 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 Shutdown Mode When the module is in the Shutdown mode the Ready and Run indicators turn red The default state is OFF de energized IMPORTANT In safety critical applications that use one sensor or single actuator it is important that the sensor failure modes be predictable and understood so that there is little probability of a failed sensor not responding to a critical process condition Test the sensor regularly either by dynamic process conditions that are verified in the 1715 system or by manual intervention testing It is recommended that a written test plan is used for all testing The function of a signal must be considered In many cases redundant sensor and actuator configurations can be used or differing sensor and actuator types provide alterna
159. d reset Pressing the Reset button during operation resets the fault Repeat the above steps to install the redundant adapter Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 265 AppendixA Status Indicators 1715 Digital Input Module The digital input module has these status indicators DIGITAL INPUT 1715 IB16D Allen Bradley Healthy Ready Run Man Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channe af Channel 08 Channel 09 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 32092 Indicator Description A Healthy general status display Ready redundancy status indicator Run network status indicator ra Channel 0 7 8 15 channel status indicators 266 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Status Indicators Appendix A Status indicators for the 1715 IB16D digital input module are shown in this table Table 54 Digital Input Module Status Indicators Indicator State Description Healthy Steady off No power Steady green Module operational The module has been configured and is operating without any faults Flashing green Standby The module has not been configured Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on the module Ready Steady off No power or no partner module present Steady green Synchronized Synchronized with partner module redundant oper
160. d test requirements as recorded in Test Report US UL ExTR15 0038 00 Quality Assessment Report DK ULD QAR10 0001 02 US ETL QAR12 0005 01 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 IECEx Certificate IEC a d MN of Conformity Certificate No IECEx UL 15 0032X Date of Issue 2015 07 23 Issue No 0 Page 3 of 3 Schedule EQUIPMENT Equipment and systems covered by this certificate are as follows These devices are low power open type programmable logic controllers that are intended for installation in an ultimate enclosure Please see Annex for additional details CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION YES as shown below See Annex for details Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 41 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions Annex to IECEx UL 15 0032X The 1715 Programmable Logic Controller Series consist of the following modules Backplane Ratings 1715 TADOF8 8 Channel Dual Analog Output Model Description Voltage Current mA Input Output Ratings Vdc 1715 A2A Dual Processor 18 32 10 4A Backplane 400mA per slot 1715 A3IO I O Backplane 18 32 9 6A 400mA per slot 1715 AENTR Processor Module 18 32 380 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module 16 18 32 260 Input 0 32Vdc Channel 6 5 mA 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module 18 32 260 Input 18 32Vdc
161. dant I O System Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 167 Chapter 5 168 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System 2 In the application from the File menu choose New to open the New Controller dialog box File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools wi B New h Ctrl N EE Open Ctrl o Close Ctrl S New Component gt Import Component gt The New Controller dialog box appears New Controler RT Vendor Allen Bradley Type 1756 L61 ControlLogix5561 Controller X 0 Revision g M Cancel pw Iv Redundancy Enabled Name Redundant 1 OQ System n Description a Chassis Type 1756 10 10 Slot ControlLogix Chassis Slot 0 m Safety Partner Slat mone Create In EARSLogix 5ODONProjects Browse Make sure to check Redundancy Enabled if this is a redundancy application 3 In the New Controller dialog box from the Type pull down menu choose your ControlLogix controller Enter the controller Name Chassis Type and Slot Number to create the new controller project The previous example shows the 1756 L61 controller in slot 0 5 Click OK You now see the new controller in the I O Configuration tree of the Controller Organizer Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 amp Controller Redundant_IO_System Controller Tags 73 Controller Fault Handler 3 Power Up Handler Tasks
162. ddress swapping the same IP address subnet mask and gateway address is assigned to both the partnered EtherNet IP adapters You cannot assign the backup module an IP address it is automatically assigned the next highest IP address after the primary s The backup module of the pair is assigned the primary s or active module s IP address plus one For example if you assign the IP address of 192 168 1 3 to the primary active module after synchronization the secondary EtherNet IP adapter automatically is assigned IP address 192 168 1 4 Note This graphic only is for illustrative purposes In normal operation the secondary adapter is not shown in the RSWho window zu AB ETHIP 2 Ethernet E 192 168 1 3 lt 1715 AENTR A d E 192 168 1 4 g 1715 AENTR B Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 175 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Table 23 Module Definition Parameters 4 Click Change The Module Definition dialog box appears RETE Detar OX Series A z Revision 2 X 15 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Redundant Yes SIL2 Safety No x Chassis Size 26 zl Parameters Description Series Module series letter Revision Major Choose the revision of the module Minor Set the minor revision of the module This field is enabled while o
163. des information on using 1715 I O modules in a low demand SIL CL claim limit 2 system such as a ControlLogix based SIL 2 system For SIL 2 safety application requirements specific to installing programming and operating a ControlLogix application refer to the Using ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference Manual publication 1756 RM001 IMPORTANT TheT V Rheinland Group has approved the 1715 Redundant 1 0 System for use in safety related applications up to and including SIL 2 according to these standards e 1EC61508 edition 1 2000 e EC61511 Approval requirements are based on the standards current at the time of certification See Appendix E PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System programmable electronic systems PES shall be aware of the safety ATTENTION Personnel responsible for the application of safety related requirements in the application of the system and shall be trained in using the System Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 211 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications SIL 2 Safety Application To use the 1715 Redundant I O system in SIL 2 safety applications you must Reauirements have revision 2 001 or later of the adapter firmware the latest Add on Profiles q and the 1715 SIL 2 Add On Instructions IMPORTANT ForSIL2 safety applications you must have the following e Firmware revision 2 001 or later for the 1715 AENTR adapt
164. detection With an appropriate end of line device installed and the short circuit detection diagnostic is enabled a fault is indicated when a short circuit is detected The fault indication is reset when the short is removed Overload protection User serviceable fuses are included in the termination assembly Diagnostic latch When latching is enabled diagnostic alarms are latched until they are reset This aids in detecting intermittent issues For input modules latch reset occurs only through messaging Configurable thresholds To allow flexibility in the use and choice of end of line devices you can select the thresholds for detection of inputs short circuits and open wires Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 255 Chapter8 Redundant 1 0 System Diagnostics Table 50 1715 0B8DE Module Diagnostic Features Feature Redundancy level Description Simplex or duplex Redundancy status The status of each module of a duplex pair is available in the input tag Change of state transport The connection trigger for the discrete output is change of state Data is produced when output data is consumed or when diagnostic data changes state or at the Requested Packet Interval Unlike the discrete input module change of state production cannot be disabled for the discrete output module No load detection A fault is indicated when no load is detected while the output point
165. duit est livr avec des marquages sur sa plaque d identification qui indiquent le code de temp rature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combin s dans un syst me le code de temp rature le plus d favorable code de temp rature le plus faible peut tre utilis pour d terminer le code de temp rature global du syst me Les combinaisons d quipements dans le syst me sont sujettes inspection par les autorit s locales qualifi es au moment de l installation EXPLOSION HAZARD N e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous e Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous RISQUE D EXPLOSION e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher l quipement e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reli s cet quipement l aide de vis loquets coulissants
166. dule e You are using a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet but you do not want the controller to look for a module that does not exist yet In this case you can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot The limits field is a variable that lets you set the channel output current values based on a scaling factor You set the minimum and maximum output values by using the scaling factor The scaling factor requires you to set a percentage ofthe engineering values This gives a linear transformation between the engineering values and the output scaled values across the defined range The default minimum and maximum values are 0 equals 4 mA and 100 equals 20 mA Regardless of the Limits field settings the output current is clamped at 0 24 mA maximum The module can operate with values beyond the 4 20 mA range If an input signal beyond the low and high signals is present at the module for example 3 mA that data is represented in terms of the engineering units set during scaling Table 22 shows example values that can appear based on the example that is mentioned previously Table 22 Current Values Represented in Engineering Units Current Engineering Units Value 4mA 0 12 mA 50 20mA 10096 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Operating Modes Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 This section dis
167. dules The maximum length of an entire bus or backplane the combination of I O base units and expansion cables is 10 m The assembly consists ofa cable terminated by multi way plugs and a pair of adapters The expansion cable offers these features e Two meter cable length e Secure with retaining screws and screw cap screws e Connects all command and response signals and system power e Screened to reduce emissions For additional information on pinout and pin allocations see 1715 Redundant I O System Technical Data publication 1715 T D001 Cable Assembly The cable assembly consists of an SCSI 3 cable and two ferrites The ferrites are snap on components that reduce resonance emissions Fit the ferrites 50 mm 1 97 in from each end and secure with cable ties either side of the ferrites 80 Item Description 1 SCSI 3 Cable 2 Ferrite 3 Cable Tie 32080M Table 8 Cable Assembly Item Description 1 SCSI 3 cable 2 Ferrite 3 Cable tie Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Expansion Cable The expansion cable has a left cable adapter and a right cable adapter Connect one end to the right hand bus connector of an I O base or adapter base unit The other end connects to the left hand bus connector of an I O base unit Figure 26 1 0 Expansion Cable Adapters SCSI 3 Cable ia Cable Adapter Cable Adapter 32086 M Cable plug as
168. e Gander Canter N at N at e Channela o Cines 9 eme H al xs H o camaro o channel 10 o caman O o amat e g Devan g pe e 2 xe H 8 ean o Emus OJH omes O o Cam g I oO I IU Pisssssso o ssssissss o ssSSSssSSo o ssss EREEEE Ssississisg reges Ssss esses ssiees m T vty 6 y e way e a reads D win je dH Hy oman e adn ou Ja giae ems H pe Seen C pera ammin e Sarao edu e e niser 1 4 amnios Oed O e poH Faces Hi wms S e Oum e Fast H eco S e per Fac H us a e Bi atA N N o cenis Je cud o o ends Qendm e o o Gendt e dendo e o E Send e aerem O o channel 2 Den o o Dues channels O o o Cranners Ow je jo io p IJ Senis 0 9j c5 i K Ca
169. e Steady amber Recovery mode The module is in Recovery mode Flashing amber Unlocked Adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state Unlabeled Status 2 Located directly below Unlabeled Status 1 used in Recovery mode Steady off No power The module has no power or is not in recovery mode Steady amber Recovery mode The module is in Recovery mode Flashing amber Unlocked Adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state Ethernet 1 and 2 264 Steady off No power no link There is no power or an Ethernet link is not established Steady green Link present A valid Ethernet link has been established Amber Activity Tx and or Rx activity is present Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Status Indicators Appendix A Reset Button The reset button does the following three functions e Firmware recovery Press the Reset button while cycling power if communication during a firmware upgrade is interrupted that causes the module to become inoperable Cycle power to the module while pressing the button This places the adapter in Safe mode so that you can flash it again e Recover a lost IP address Press and hold the Reset button while cycling power This places the module in Safe mode Cycle power again without holding the Reset button This re enables BootP mode The adapter requests a new IP address e Fault reset Certain faults on an I O module require a har
170. e JIB 16D_Duplex_ Reconciled_Inpu E Scope fla MyStdProj X Faena Read Write s Style m Constant Open Configuration Cancel Help 7 Enter the module RPI Verify SIL2 check data is correct for incoming packets IB18D Duplex SIL2 Verify SIL2 check data is correct for incoming p IB16D Duplex SIL2 IB16Tag Reset ResetTag 0e my1715adptr 2 C my1715adptr 2 l Config Data Input Data Reconciled Input Data IB16Recinput Module RPI 60 0 v CRTL Countdown Number Discarded Data Packets 0e 0e HEData Valid HCvalid Data being rcvd HEReset Tiedown Fault HECRC error 2 Hi duplicate_seq_num Hi low _seq_num HESourcelP error FSourceSlot error FEDestinationlP error FDestinationSlot error 2 FEvariantlID error Module Connection Status HCAOI Running 2 FXSIL2 Output Reset Needed To optimize system bandwidth type the same RPI value from the Module Configuration dialog box Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 247 Chapter7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Configure an Output Module Follow these steps to configure an output module Add On Instruction Add On Instruction 248 1 Add the Add On Instruction to your routine from the Add On tab of the instruction toolbar Create a tag for the Add On Instruction by using the default data type an
171. e SIL2 program Description Schedule in i9 SIL2 Inhibit Program Synchronize Redundancy Data after Execution 8 Right click che newly created program and choose New Routine 242 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 9 Name the routine 10 Select the appropriate Type Ladder or Function Block is recommended for SIL 2 safety functions 11 Click OK IMPORTANT Create as many SIL 2 programs and routines as required for the SIL 2 logic keeping in mind the goal is to have logic that is the following Easy to understand Easy to trace Easy to change Easy to test Well documented Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 243 Chapter7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Configure an Input Module Add On Instruction 244 Use the following instructions to configure an input module IMPORTANT The 1715 AENTR adapter functions as an input module when using 1715 SIL 2 Add On Instructions Follow these steps to configure an input module Add On Instruction 1 From the Instruction toolbar Add On tab add the Add On instruction to your routine 2 Create a tag for the Add On Instruction by using the default data type and Read Write External Access The tag can be controller or program scoped BTD Duplex SIL2 Verify SIL2 check data is
172. e between 18 32V DC The system has been designed to operate with most commercially available industrial uninterruptible power supplies UPS To select a suitable power supply calculate the overall system load that must be powered by using the following table include any additional devices and add a contingency allowance between 25 50 Component Power Requirement Adapter 8 0 W Digital input module 4 0W Analog input module 4 0W Digital output module 3 0W Analog output module 3 6W Power supply Varies Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 73 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Install the Adapter Base Unit The adapter base unit supports a pair of adapters The adapter base unit has connections for two power feeds four Ethernet ports and two adapters on the front of the unit and one I O base connector on the right hand side of the unit The connections for the adapters are commonly referred to as adapter slots To mount the 1715 A2A adapter base unit follow these steps 1 Place the 1715 A2A adapter base unit onto the DIN rails and position them toward the left leaving space for the I O base units to the right 2 Secure the adapter base unit onto the DIN rails by sliding the retaining lever below the base unit to the left as far as it goes until it latches in the locked position Adapter Base Unit 45246 Install the 1 0 Base Unit You can install
173. e 48 1715 AENTR Adapter Diagnostic Features Feature Redundancy level Description Duplex only Redundancy status The status of each module of a duplex pair is available in the input tag Communication diagnostics Table 49 1715 IB16D Module Diagnostic Features Feature Redundancy level Various communication diagnostic information is available through the input tag For each physical Ethernet port this includes Link status duplex setting speed and auto negotiation status For the module this includes CIP on EtherNet IP timeout count CIP on EtherNet IP connection count CIP on EtherNet IP network Lost Packets count TCP Connection count and CPU utilization Description Simplex or duplex Redundancy status The status of each module of a duplex pair is available in the input tag Change of state transport The connection trigger for the discrete modules is to be change of state Points that trigger production The trigger for change of state production is selectable on a point basis for values and on a module basis for diagnostics Open wire detection With an appropriate end of line device installed and the open wire detection diagnostic is enabled a fault is indicated when an open wire condition is detected The fault indication is reset when the open wire condition no longer exists Open wire detection can be disabled to prevent unused points from indicating faults Short circuit
174. e communication between modules for fault tolerant operation e Operates as a simplex or duplex configuration e Two terminal current regulating device Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 157 Chapter4 Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features Table 20 Performance Criteria for the Analog Output Module Attribute Value Data Input value least significant bit control 0 98 uA Data Output value least significant bit monitor 3 9 uA Channel Measurement Error at 25 C 77 F 2 C 23 6 F After 1 year at 40 C 104 F 0 30 10 pA After 2 years at 40 C 104 F 0 35 10 pA After 5 years at 40 C 104 F 0 44 10 uA Temperature drift 0 01 0 1 pA per C ATTENTION Maintenance must be performed only by qualified personnel otherwise personal injury or death or damage to the system can result Features Common to All The features that are common to all 1715 and ControlLogix analog I O modules Analo g l 0 Modules are listed in Table 21 The features are described later in this section Table 21 Common Analog 1 0 Module Features Feature Page Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 158 Module Fault Reporting 158 Fully Software Configurable 159 Status Indicator Information 159 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All 1715 I O modules can be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall
175. e module Ready Steady off No power or no partner module present Steady green Synchronized Synchronized with partner module redundant operation Run Steady off No power no backplane communication No power or the module is not communicating over the backplane Steady green Connected The module has at least one established connection Flashing green No connections The module is communicating over the backplane but there are no established connections Channel 0 7 Steady off Off de energized The channel is not being driven that is output current 0 4 mA Steady amber On energized The channel is being driven i e output current is gt 0 4 mA Flashing amber Field fault A field fault has been detected on this channel Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on this channel Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 273 AppendixA X Status Indicators Notes 274 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Threshold Values for Digital Inputs Appendix B 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics This section describes how to calculate and set threshold values for digital inputs The module determines the channel state and the line fault status by comparing the channel input voltage with defined threshold values Line faults such as short circuit and wire off can be determined by using different input voltage values With this module
176. e of checking the calibration of analog modules is the same for input and output modules to verify that the accuracy and repeatability of the module is maintained the procedures that are involved differ per module When you check the calibration of input modules you use current voltage or ohms calibrators to send a signal to the module and check the correct values are reported When you calibrate output modules you use a digital multimeter DMM to measure the signal that the module is sending out IMPORTANT Before beginning calibration checking do the following Stop the process your output module is controlling or your input module is tracking e Disconnect input signals and connect test signals Any control that depends on the normal input signals does not have them during the calibration check process e Disconnect output signals and connect a suitable measuring instrument Any control that depends on the outputs from this module does not have them during the calibration check process e Make sure the equipment a Multimeter is calibrated The calibration drift process can impair control When you begin the calibration check process if a real time connection is open the module points you are calibrating can fault We recommend that you change your controller to Program mode before beginning calibration IMPORTANT The 1715 IF16 and 1715 OF8 modules can be operated with multiple ranges Verify that the appropriate Output
177. e ofa type that is not the same as the physically installed module The termination assembly type simplex duplex determines the CIP messages for corresponding CIP objects that the adapter processes for each I O module Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 System Performance Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 This section discusses connections and RPI settings for the 1715 Redundant I O System Connections The adapter has one required connection and does not support a rack connection Each I O module has one required connection simplex or duplex For example the system in Figure 11 has five I O modules Four are duplex and one is simplex They are all configured for data connection Figure 11 Duplex and Simplex Connections E 1715 AENTR A RemoteScn d 1715Redundant l 0 1715 AENTR A RemoteScn B 2 1715 IB16D A DigIn2 B 4 1715 OB8DE A DigQut4 B 6 1715 1F16 A AnlgIn6 B 8 1715 OF8I A AniqOut8 A 10 1715 IF16 A AnglIn10 Simplex The example in Figure 11 shows six connections one for each entry in the configuration Table 3 RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer Configuration Connection Module Duplex Simplex Module Description 1 1715 AENTR Duplex Ethernet Adapter 1 1715 IB16D Duplex 16 point Digital Input 1 1715 0B8DE Duplex 8 point Diagnostic Digital Output 1 1715 IF16 Duplex 16 point Analog Input 1 1715 0F8l Duplex 8 point An
178. e required wiring protection devices 2 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle If there is a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel limits the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached 3 The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity or wiring to AC power sources 148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 Follow these steps to reset a fuse 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab j EE New Module E x General Connection Module Info A Module InfoB Configuration Fault Program Action fgn No Load Point I Detection Ralkalkalcalkalcalca RRR T TIT Status Creating Cancel Help 2 Click Reset for a particular point on the module to reset a fuse 3 Click OK Diagnostic Latch Information Diagnostic latching lets this module latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears The Reset Diagnostic Latch service can clear latched diagnostic features IMPORTANT Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the power is cycled for the 1 0 module Rockwell Automation Publi
179. e the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 6 Click the Connection tab The Connection tab appears 3 Module Properties EN2TR 0 1715 AENTR 2 1 General Connection Module info A Module Info B Intemet Protocol Port Configuration Network Requested Packet Interval RPI Inhibit Module Table 24 Connection Tab Parameters Parameters Requested Packet Interval Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP ms 60 0 750 0 Major Fault On Controller ff Connection Fails While in Run Mode Description The Requested Packet Interval RPI specifies the rate at which the module and the ControlLogix controller exchange data to and from each other The allowable range of the RPI is from 60 750 ms with a default of 60 ms When the specified time frame elapses the module and the ControlLogix controller produce data for each other Inhibit Module Check or clear this box to inhibit or uninhibit your connection to the module Inhibiting the module causes the connection to the module to be closed When you check this box and go online the icon representing this module in the controller organizer displays the Inhibited icon Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP Check this box to configure the controller so that failure of the connection to this module causes a major fault on the controller if the connection for the module fa
180. ecks it is deemed valid If the checks fail for a period gt the CRTL value assigned to the module a SIL 2 Reset is required A SIL 2 Reset acknowledges that there has been a fault within the data and that new data if valid must once again be used The following diagram shows 1715 module output behavior N NOTE Power Off transition may occur at 3 a any time from any state Only this so Power O transition is shown to clarify the diagram Powered OFF Outputs OFF Pp lH Power On x d Outputs OFF Valid SIL2 Data Received S3 Outputs As V Received 7 Oe er X SIL2ResetNeeded a NO Valid SIL2 Data Update NOT Received 1 Within CRTL M 4 S4 N Outputs setto A Configured Safe Y State SIL2ResetNeeded YES SIL2 Reset Received Valid SIL2 Data Update NOT Received Within CRTL Valid SIL2 Data Update Received N K Within CRTL b y S5 b Outputs set to E Configured Safe State ___ SIL2ResetNeeded J ILLE NO Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 253 Chapter7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules TIP A SIL 2 reset of output modules can be performed only by clicking Reset on the SIL 2 Safety tab of the Module Properties dialog box or a LO to HI transition of the reset tag in the 1715 SIL 2 Add On Instructions When using input tags that is data from a 1715 input module to a Cont
181. ed and all points 0 7 are selected If the header checkbox is cleared all points 0 7 are cleared To select load fault alarms are latched until reset for a specific point check the checkbox in the appropriate row for that point To dear load fault alarms are latched until reset for a specific point clear the checkbox in the appropriate row for that point Reset Latched Diagnostics Click Reset to reset the diagnostic latch service When online and in Program mode Remote Program mode Run mode the Reset button is enabled for a point When offline the Reset button is dimmed for a point Reset Fuse Click Reset to reset the fuse reset short overload service When online and in Program mode Remote Program mode Run mode the Reset button is enabled for a point When offline the Reset button is dimmed for all points 11 Click the Fault Program Action tab 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 The Fault Program Action tab appears E Module Properties AENTR 6 1715 OBSDE 2 1 ojaa Generar Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Fault Program Action 4 id iid iid id iid 14 Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Sta
182. edundant No Y SIL2 Safety No Table 30 Module Definition Parameters for Digital Input Module Duplex Mode Chapter 5 Parameters Description Series Choose the Series of the module Only the series that the module supports are displayed Revision Major Choose the Revision of the module Minor Sets the minor revision of the module Program and Remote Run modes For SIL 2 application choose version 3 01 07 or later for 1715 1 0 modules The valid range is 1 255 This field is enabled while offline and while in the Program Remote Electronic Keying Choose the Electronic Keying that you wish to use for the selected module Valid values are Compatible Module default Exact Match or Disable Keying See Electronic Keying on page 120 Connection Leave as Data Listen Only is not supported Redundant Yes for Duplex mode No for Simplex mode SIL 2 Safety Choose No if SIL 2 operation is not required information on SIL 2 configuration see Chapter 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Choose Yes to enable SIL 2 operation The safety pull down menu appears only if using Add on Profile version 2 01 007 or later Two new tabs are available for SIL 2 configuration if you choose Yes For 189 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System The Module Properties dialog box appears General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configur
183. em in SIL 2 Safety Applications Enable SIL 2 Operation Follow these steps to enable a module for SIL 2 operation 1 On the Module Definition dialog box from the Series pull down menu choose Series A 2 From the Revision pull down menu choose 2 001 or later 3 From the Connection pull down menu choose Data From the Redundant pull down menu choose No for single modules with simplex termination assemblies or Yes if you are using two modules with duplex termination assemblies 5 From the SIL 2 Safety pull down menu choose Yes Module Definition x Series fa z Revision 2 hd 1 Electronic Keying Compatible Module hd Connection Data x EE B Redundant Yes SIL2 Safety 4 a Specify the Connection Reaction Time Limit and Requested Packet Interval On the SIL 2 Safety tab of the module enter the requested packet interval RPI and connection reaction time limit CRTL The module RPI is the same as the setting on the Connection tab IMPORTANT When online the Reset button on the SIL 2 Safety tab appears solid when only the output data on any 1715 output module must be reset See pages 228 and 253 The Reset button resets only output data for output modules that is the 1715 OF8I and 1715 OB8DE module outputs To reset inputs for all 1715 modules you must use the Reset Input parameter within the Add On Instructions See Performing a SIL 2 Reset on page 253 224 Rockwell Automation Publicatio
184. embly Shield Required Terminal Blocks 32116M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 107 Chapter2 Installation Instructions This field loop connection is used for three wire analog field devices Figure 46 Three wire Analog Input 3 Wire Analog Input 24V DC Termination Assembly Shield Required Terminal Blocks 3217 M This field loop connection method is used for four wire analog field devices Figure 47 Four wire Analog Input 4 Wire Analog Input Termination Assembly Terminal Blocks 32118M 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Field Wiring of Analog Input Termination Assemblies The termination assembly routes each analog input through a circuit similar to that shown in Figure 48 The input channel is protected with a 50 mA fuse When an extreme over voltage is applied to the input the fuse blows Each analog input channel is terminated using a pair of high accuracy resistors presenting a combined termination resistance of 120 Q The input module monitors the channel current by measuring the voltage drop across each resistor The fuses have a plastic fuse cover that must be kept in the closed position during normal operation Standard field wiring connections are made at the terminal blocks on the termination assembly With a simplex termination assembly the input signals
185. en a slot has a termination assembly but no module c e t olsssiss sio DD GOD G Un un SS SS Slot Filler Covers at D a d 32078 M 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Power Requirements A 24V DC power supplied is required See Install the Power Supply on page 73 for complete details to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the following Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV or Protected Extra Low Voltage PELV i ATTENTION To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD all connections Cooling Requirements The 1715 AENTR adapter is designed to operate in its specified environment without forced air cooling Forced air cooling can be needed in individual circumstances such as when the system shares its enclosure with other heat producing equipment Adequate ventilation must be provided for the system and the ambient temperature in the enclosure must not be higher than the maximum operating value of 60 C 140 F The adapter dissipates all power that it uses as heat This is the power that is supplied to the terminals on the 1715 A2A adapter base unit The I O modules dissipate some of the power they take from the field power source as heat The actu
186. er Retaining Clip he DIN rails once all base units are poft the to 5 Attach anchor end stops to mounted Typical types of end stops E Lm S Si a Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 76 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Install Termination Assembly I O termination assemblies determine the type of I O modules that can be to 1 0 Base Unit installed in a particular slot The I O termination assemblies provide the mechanism to connect the field wiring specific to the I O module type to the back of one or more installed I O modules I O termination assemblies are available in single width and double width varieties A single width I O termination assembly connects the field wiring to one I O module slot for simplex operation where a double width I O termination assembly connects the field wiring to two I O module slots for duplex redundant operation I O termination assemblies can span I O base unit boundaries though the I O base units must be connected directly I O termination assemblies are keyed so that only I O modules appropriate to the termination assembly type can be installed Each redundant I O subsystem supports a maximum of 24 I O module slots which can be configured with 24 simplex I O termination assemblies 12 duplex I O termination assemblies or any combination in between Once the base units and termination assemblies have been installed the insert
187. er logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard output module Description Tag Simplex Digital Output Module Tags Include Fault DINT Fault Radix Binary O atleast one module present data good FFFFFFFF No Logix connection data bad ReadBack SINT Radix Binary 1 bit readback per point 0 7 GroupFault BOOL lif any point on the module is faulted failed PtFault SINT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 7 1 if point is faulted failed NoLoad SINT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 7 1 indicates no load ShortCircuit SINT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 7 1 indicates short circuit Duplex Digital Output Module Tags Include Fault DINT Fault Radix Binary 0 at least one module present FFFFFFFF No Logix connection ReadBack SINT Radix Binary 1 bit readback per point 0 7 ModAFault BOOL 0 Good 1 fault or module not present ModBFault BOOL 0 Good 1 fault or module not present GroupFault BOOL 1 if any point on either module is faulted failed Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 153 Chapter3 Digital 1 0 Operation Tag Description ModAGroupFault BOOL 1 if any point on Module A is faulted failed ModBGroupFault BOOL 1 if any point on Module B is faulted failed PtFault INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 if point is faulted failed on both modules ModAPtFa
188. ers e Add on Profile version 2 01 014 or later for the adapter and Add on Profile version 3 01 014 or later for the 1 0 modules e Add On Instructions version 2 001 or later when using a ControlLogix system e A1756 L7 ControlLogix controller 20 or later for SIL 2 operations See the latest certifications for software and firmware at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation certification overview page See the T V website at http www tuvasi com for SIL 2 certification listings ATTENTION ControlLogix L7 controllers are certified in RSLogix 5000 version IMPORTANT Listen Only is not supported for SIL 2 operations Only one 1756 L7 Logix controller can connect to any 1 0 module within the 1715 rack for SIL 2 safety functions IMPORTANT Safety functions that are being edited online are not SIL 2 certified from the start of the online edits to the completion of the validation of the changes 1715 1 0 Modules in SIL 2 1715 I O modules firmware revision 2 001 and later can be used in safety Safety Applications applications up to and including SIL 2 Your system can be configured with any combination of I O modules and in either Simplex or Duplex mode Two new tabs have been added to the Module Properties dialog box to configure modules for use in SIL 2 Safety applications e The SIL 2 Safety tab lets you configure the RPI connection reaction time limit access diagnostic data and perform a SIL 2 reset
189. es The termination assembly TA matches your software configuration for simplex or duplex Attached to an I O base the TA can start in any slot and can span multiple connected bases When modules are used in Duplex mode one module can be absent and the system still runs Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 Base Unit Structure The adapter base unit is always the leftmost base unit in the connection chain The total length of the base unit connection chain including all expansion cables cannot exceed 10 m 32 81 ft An adapter always occupies slot 0 or 1 An adapter base unit can support up to 8 I O base units up to 24 I O modules 1715 AENTR Adapters The leftmost adapter position or slot is 0 The rightmost adapter slot is 1 One redundant adapter pair always occupies slots 0 and 1 of the system A designates the primary adapter partner and B designates the secondary adapter partner of the redundant adapter pair This system is designed to run with two adapters It can run with one adapter for a limited time while replacing a damaged module but ideally needs both adapters running simultaneously IMPORTANT There is no method for configuring a system to use only one 1715 AENTR adapter If you use only one 1715 AENTR adapter the unused module generates errors A partner adapter can be installed or removed for replacement while the 1715 Red
190. esigned safety accuracy To avoid spurious declaration of channel faults it is necessary to ensure that the input signal condition satisfies the maximum slew rate criteria that are defined in the 1715 Redundant I O System Specifications Technical Data publication 1715 TD001 So it can be necessary to condition the input signal such as by filtering Field Loop Circuits for Digital Inputs The recommended digital input field loop circuits for the 1715 IB16D digital input module are shown on page 90 For line monitored digital input loop circuit wiring and recommended threshold values see Appendix C Recommended Circuits for Digital Outputs This circuit is suitable for simplex and duplex configurations of digital output modules The two 10 A fuses that are shown are supplied with the adapter in the output termination assembly They help protect all output circuits that are associated with the particular termination assembly ATTENTION For inductive loads connect a diode at the actuator to protect the adapter against back EMF Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 97 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 24V dc Field Power Source 24V dc Power Distribution Field m Terminals Termination Assembly OV 46198 98 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 VFIELD 1 24V FIELD VFIELD 2 POWE Response Bus Response
191. esigned to ensure the channels are operating within their designed safety accuracy For details of slew rate limitations refer to the 1715 Redundant I O System Specifications Technical Data publication 1715 T D001 Field Faults A field fault is indicated when a detected fault condition is isolated to a field condition or field device and the cause is not the hardware that is associated with the channel or output module Examples are an open circuit field connection no field power or an out of range signal A CHANNEL indicator flashing AMBER indicates these faults Steady AMBER indicates that the channel is ON or in range User Application Fault Indications and Logging The information available includes the following e Module presence that is Shutdown or Run modes e Module health and status that is Module Status or Fault e Channel health and status that is individual channel Module Status fault or field fault e An echo of the front panel indicators for each module Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Status Indicators Appendix A Troubleshooting Faults Follow this troubleshooting procedure to diagnose field faults 1 Note the affected channel as a field fault can indicate that there is a blown fuse on an input channel 2 Check the input field connections to the faulty channel to find the source of the over voltage that caused the fuse to blow 3 After you have removed the source of
192. et that task to the highest priority 1 SIL 2 safety logic and logic that is intended for use in non SIL 2 functions must be separate The task period and task watchdog are configured in the Task Properties dialog box a Task Properties SIL2 o tz General Configuration Program Phase Schedule Monitor Type Penodc Period 20 000 ms Priority 1 gt Lower Number Yields Higher Priority Watchdog 50 000 ms Disable Automatic Output Processing To Reduce T ask Overhead Inhibit Task Configuring the Output Module Program Fault Actions For a SIL 2 safety system you are responsible for making sure that the SIL 2 related safety code including the SIL 2 Add On Instructions are being scanned using a safety task watchdog See Using ControLogix in SIL 2 Safety Applications Reference Manual for safety watchdog requirements Safety Watchdog Configure the properties of the task that is used for safety correctly for your application e Priority must be the highest priority task in the application lowest number e Watchdog the value that is entered for the SIL 2 safety task must be large enough for all logic in the task to be scanned If the task execution time exceeds the watchdog time a major fault occurs on the controller Users must monitor the watchdog and program the system outputs to transition to the safe state typically the OFF state in the event of a major fault occurring on the controller For more
193. ffline and while in the Program Remote Program and Remote Run modes It appears dimmed when in Run mode or when electronic keying is set to Disable Keying For SIL 2 applications choose version 2 01 07 or later for 1715 AENTR modules Electronic Keying Connection Electronic Keying see Electronic Keying on page 120 Valid values are Compatible Module default Exact Match or Disable Keying Leave as Data Listen Only is not supported Redundant Always Yes SIL 2 Safety Choose No if SIL 2 operation is not required Choose Yes to enable SIL 2 operation The safety pull down menu appears only if using Add on Profile version 2 01 007 or later Two new tabs are available for SIL 2 configuration if you choose Yes For information on SIL 2 configuration see Chapter 6 Chassis Size 176 Choose the chassis size you want to use 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 The chassis size is a function ofthe number of bases that are installed in your system which comes in either groups of three slots per base for 1 0 bases and two slots per base for the redundant adapter base All slots in the chassis do not have to be populated To extend the size of a chassis its size must be consistent with the number of base slots used The minimum chassis size is 5 slots which are built from one 2 slot adapter base and one 3 slot 1 0 base 5 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configur
194. fies Input Data Input Data the check data N amp 4 Pop Module Configuration NC Check Data Safe State Defaults a Safe State Defaults Important The 1715 IF16 module is shown but the example also applies to the 1715 IB16D module Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 235 Chapter7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Figure 66 Diagram of Output Module Add On Instruction Input Data System 1715 OF8 Input Data Packet OF8 Duplex SIL2 Add On Instruction 1756 Controller Tags jaj B Hh Scoto ES Input Data status Input Data z SEI DI ES SIL 2 Check Data SIL 2 Check Data l we ars 1715 A2A 1715 A3IO p gt F ES Ecce TheAdd On Reconciled Reconciled Instruction verifies Input Data Input Data 1715 0F8 Configuration Tag thecheckdata 4 Ci Module Configuration Module Configuration e Check Data J Check Data lt Safe State Defaults Safe State Defaults Output Data System 1756 Controller Tags OF8 Duplex SIL2 Add On Instruction N 1715 0F8 Data Packet 9 i Requested Requested je e Output Data Output Data The Add On listet peapa adds the check data tothe Generate Sequence requested output data and Number Output Data gene
195. finition Series Electronic Keying Compatible Module Electronic Keying Compatible Module z Connection Data a Connection Data x Input Data Analog Only Input Data Analog Only x AFE Float Data Format Float Redundant SIL2 Safety Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 209 Chapter 5 210 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System See Figure on page 188 for General parameter settings 3 Click Change referring to Figure on page 201 for Module Definition parameter settings Change Redundant to No to place the module in Simplex mode 5 Click OK The Verify Module Properties dialog box appears See page 193 6 Click Yes A new General tab appears showing only one slot as available The module is now in Simplex mode Connection SIL2 Safety Module Info Input States When CRTL Expires Configuration Limits Fault Program Action AENTR Module Definition Revision Electronic Keying Connection Input Data 1715 OF8I 8 Channel Current Analog Output Isolated Allen Bradley Analog_Output_Duplex pz 21 Compatible Module Data Analog Only Float 7 Click the Connection tab see page 177 8 Click the Module Info tab see page 178 9 Click the Configuration tab see page 206 10 Click the Limits tab see page 207 11 Click the Fault Program Action tab see page 208
196. full responsibility for understanding whether the device being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application Exact Match Indicates that all keying attributes must match to establish communication If any attribute does not match precisely communication with the device does not occur Carefully consider the implications of each keying option when selecting one IMPORTANT Changing Electronic Keying parameters online interrupts connections to the device and any devices that are connected through the device Connections from other controllers can also be broken If an 1 0 connection to a device is interrupted the result can be a loss of data More Information For more detailed information on Electronic Keying see Electronic Keying in Logix5000 Control Systems Application Technique publication LOGIX AT001 120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Install the Adapters Install two 1715 AENTR adapters eum 1715 AENTR Allen I eum Module Status Redundancy Status Network Status Rack Status Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 32096M To install the 1715 AENTR adapters on to the 1715 A2A two slot base unit follow these steps IMPORTANT You must inspect the connector pins before you install the modules If you install modules with bent or damaged connector pins it can damage the backplane connectors Also inspect the socket contacts on the b
197. g If Installing from the CD 1 Insert the CD that was shipped with your module into your computer 2 Follow the prompts to complete the installation If Installing from the Product Compatibility and Download Center Website To download the Add on Profiles for the 1715 adapters and I O modules follow these steps 1 Go to the Product Compatibility and Download Center website 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 2 Enter the catalog number 1715 and click Find Downloads Start by selecting products Product Search All Categories E Al Famities IX fico Selections Clear All You can also type a product name into the textbox to the right TUmpie 1756 161 LS Logix Ethernet 1715 AENTR amp 1715 AENTR A 1 005 e 3 Click Show Downloads on the Find Downloads dialog box FIND DOWNLOADS Available downloads for the selected products Click on the expand icon to see other version downloads Change Selections Compare Selections WE Bookmark DJE Reference Software RSLogix 5000 RSLogix 5000 9324 RLDx RSLogix 5000 programming software All you need for discrete process All 20 x 20 01 02 20 01 01 1715 AENTR series A 20 01 00 20 00 00 19 01 00 19 1 005 ya SA SA SA show downloads 4 Click the firmware revision that you need on the Available Downloads dialog box and install che Add on Profiles to
198. g input module Added performance criteria for the analog output module Module inhibiting when using multiple controllers Changed Get Support Now website to the Product and Compatibility Download Center website added Add on Profile versions for the adapter and 1 0 modules Added reference to the release list of approved versions on www tuvasi com Updated screen shots throughout to reflect Logix Designer version 21 interface and to include SIL 2 operation options Connections for Listen Only Module definition parameters for 1715 IB16D digital input module in Duplex mode for SIL 2 applications Added Important table on how to change Alarms Limits values Added a chapter about SIL 2 safety operation with 1715 redundant 1 0 Added a chapter about SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 redundant 1 0 Corrected text from 3 9 to 4 3 Corrected text from 15 to 15 4 Added Calibration Drift Checks section SIL 2 safety application online configuration restrictions Added appendix for PFD and PFH calculations for a SIL 2 system Added appendix for SIL 2 Applications Checklist Added appendix for Tag Definitions Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 321 AppendixG History of Changes Notes 322 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Numerics 1715 A2A adapter base 52 74 expansion cable 85 1715 A310 expansion cable 83 1 0 base 55 75 1715 AEN
199. g on which configuration you choose you can skip the steps that do not apply 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Step 1 Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module in Duplex Mode 1 Toadda 1715 IB16D Digital Input module in Duplex mode to the project right click che 1715 AENTR adapter and choose New Module amp 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fa 0 1756 L61 Redundant IO System J 1 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr ee Ethernet g 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module 3 riz EE B 1756 EN2TR cx EBENEN Tq gi Paste Ctrl V Print gt The Select Module dialog box appears xi Module Analog Digital 1715 IB16D 16 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Input Allen Bradley 1715 OB8DE 8 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Output Electronically Fused Allen Bradley Find Add Favorite Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 187 Chapter 5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System 2 Expand the Digital module list select the 1715 IB16D module and click OK The General tab appears 3 Module Properties AENTR 2 1715 IB16D 2 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Type 1715 IB16D 16 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent AENTR Name b 16d Slot 2 Z Description Module Definition
200. ge until initialized with a value within 0 1 of full scale of its current value when one of these conditions occurs Module initial connection powerup Module transition from Program mode back to Run mode Module re establishes communication after fault Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 10 Click the Limits tab The Limits Configuration tab appears 3 Module Properties AENTR 12 1715 OF8I 2 1 ETHECE fee General Connection Module info A Module Info B Configuration Limits Fault Program Action Channel 0 iea eg nsa reed ES E Disable All Alarms EI Latch Limit Alarms Limits ie IF 3l Latch Rate Alarm High Clamp 100 0 Inlat A L Low Clamp 0 0 Inlat e Ramp in Run Mode Ramp Rate 0 0 as Inlate EJ am Status Offline Lok Cancel Ay _ Hep Table 37 Limits Parameters for Analog Output Duplex Module Parameters Description Channel Click the channel number to configure parameters for the specified channel 0 7 High Clamp Limit Enter a High Clamp Limit between 9999999 99999999 The default is 100 0000 The High Clamp Limit must be greater than the Low Clamp Limit Any out of range value causes a profile validation error HI appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode Unlatch High Clamp Limit Click Unlatch High Clamp Limit to send a message to the module to
201. he channel or the module is not communicating over the 1 0 backplane Steady amber Signal present A valid signal has been detected that is measured signal gt 0 4 mA Flashing amber Field fault A field fault has been detected on this channel Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on this channel Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 271 Appendix A Status Indicators 1715 Analog Output Module The analog output module has these status indicators 272 ANALOG OUTPUT 1715 OF8l Allen Bradley Healthy Ready Run onw Channel 00 Channel 01 Channel 02 Channel 03 Channel 04 Channel 05 Channel 06 Channel 07 a L Oo oO O O 0 O O O 32089 Indicator Description A Healthy general status display Ready redundancy status indicator C Run network status indicator D Channel 0 7 channel status indicators Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Status Indicators Appendix A Status indicators for the 1715 OF8I analog output module are shown in this table Table 57 Analog Output Module Status Indicators Indicator State Description Healthy Steady off No power Steady green Module operational The module has been configured and is operating without any faults Flashing green Standby The module has not been configured Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on th
202. hen startup is complete the status indicators light as follows 1715 IB16D 1715 OB8DE 1715 IF16 Modules 1715 0F8l Module Indicator Status Indicator Status Module Status Green Module Status Green Redundancy Status Green Redundancy Status Red to steady green Network Status Green Network Status Amber Channel 0 7 8 15 Inputs show Green Channel 0 7 Inputs show Green Outputs show Amber Outputs show Amber If the module fails to go online see the troubleshooting guide in Chapter 8 To install the slot filler covers follow these steps 1 Place a slot filler cover on the empty slot 2 Screw the clamp screw 90 to the lock position by usinga 9 mm screwdriver o S o BEREI NWA IE E IE E Slot Filler Covers s ate ae Reset Reset 32078 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Remove Modules Modules can be removed online without shutting down the system or upsetting the process in redundant configurations only However pulling out simplex module impacts the process Remove modules by carefully pulling them out of the base unit by using this procedure 1 Turn the locking screw on the front of the
203. his illustration is only an example and is for illustrative purposes only Item Description Adapter base unit NA Adapter A module w Adapter B module 1 0 base unit Simplex I 0 module Duplex 1 0 module first in pair Duplex 1 0 module second in pair 1 0 base unit S gt N aJ gt Simplex 1 0 module 10 Duplex 1 0 module first in pair 11 Duplex 1 0 module second in pair 12 Power connections 13 Ethernet connections The adapter and base units are DIN rail mounted and connections are chained together from left to right Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 65 Chapter 2 66 Installation Instructions Base Units The adapter base unit is always the leftmost base unit in the connection chain The total length of the base unit backplane length including all expansion cables cannot exceed 10 m 32 81 ft A base slot adapter or I O consumes an address whether it is full or empty The first adapter in the pair occupies slot 0 and is on the left the second adapter occupies slot 1 and is on the right Only adapters can occupy the slots of the adapter base An adapter base unit can support up to 8 I O base units up to 24 I O modules on its right side Module positions within the I O base units are numbered from 2 25 the leftmost position being slot 2 The total number of slot positions in the system is 26 adapters occupy slo
204. ic Digital Input diagram correction standard inputs Short circuit information Digital Input diagram correction line monitored inputs Added reference for calibration drift checks Corrected digital input termination assembly graphics Added Attention table for inductive loads Added missing arrow on 1715 OB8DE function block diagram to go from the Control B box to the Output Control Diagram correction digital outputs Damage to pins when inserting removing 1 0 modules under power can fault the system Corrected analog inputs graphic by removing footnote numbers on voltage Added information about analog field loops input modules and analog input field devices Find and record MAC addresses Added status indicator labels to the adapter graphic ofthe locking mechanism Changes throughout the Assign an IP Address on the BOOTP DHCP Server section Verify BOOTP network settings Important table added Added last step to disable BootP DHCP Module inhibiting when using multiple controllers Corrected ohms symbol and added DC on voltage numbers Shutdown states Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 History of Changes Appendix G Change Removed references to the 1756 IA16 module Digital input module tags Digital output module tags Correction of table header to ControlLogix Analog 1 0 Modules and Components Added performance criteria for the analo
205. ication 1715 TD001 Termination Assemblies There are two types of termination assemblies for the digital input modules The application of your system determines which termination assembly you need e 1715 TASIB16D 16 channel digital input simplex termination assembly e 1715 TADIB16D 16 channel digital input duplex termination assembly Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Determining Output Module Compatibility Using Features Common to 1715 Standard Digital 1 0 Modules Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 1715 digital output modules can be used to drive various output devices Typical output devices compatible with the 1715 digital outputs include the following e Motor starters e Solenoids e Indicators When designing a system do the following e Make sure that the outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation e Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads check the documentation that is supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current necessary to operate the device The 1715 digital outputs can directly drive the 1715 digital inputs The exceptions are DC diagnostic input modules When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information specifically on the compatibility of motor starters to output modules see
206. ice faults The internal isolated power supply produces module power which the dual redundant system power inputs supply Over and undervoltage protection is applied to the module internal power supply outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 99 Chapter 2 100 Installation Instructions Command packets are received from the processor module via the EcherNet IP network The output switch control units decode and vote the output data that is addressed to them and set the output FET switches accordingly The output voltages are produced from the 24V DC field power input voltages by a power combiner circuit Each output channel has a pair of FET switches arranged in a series that are independently controlled Load current and voltage monitoring is provided for each switch Output channel protection makes sure that the output circuit is switched off when the channel load current exceeds a safe limit A reverse voltage protection circuit makes sure that externally applied voltages to any output channel do not generate current flow backwards into the module outputs In Duplex redundant mode the two fail safe output switches per channel are combined in a parallel arrangement so that they automatically form a fault tolerant output configuration In this configuration removal and of an output module is possible without any disruption to a live system The module has a range of self checking functionality
207. ics Reconfigure a Module Online PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Configure an Input Module Add On Instruction 244 Configure an Output Module Add On Instruction 248 Add On Instruction Scan Times cie eere ate veers 250 Safety Reaction Time Cal cnlatiotiss use eode brote ade e puede 250 Using the Add On Instruction Data Tags in an Application Program 252 Performing a SIL 2 Reset edis et be ev NE CHE DERE eet 253 Chapter 8 Diagnostic Features casa aq Cri RP ERRELEQUA DU EE FEM DINE 255 Appendix A Eaults siu se b Pes dta ti oa dein Saree otek idu se SR eels sacs 259 System EXnlrs assess vct odere ped PAR ERR iem Ead 259 Module Faults boe eet eem Eee ee ete OO denne anew 259 Channel Faults iu gos meteo hdi es ito ederet a es 260 Pield Eaulis ned Ey os ese eae ee UE eae RR S 260 User Application Fault Indications and Logging 260 Troubleshooting Faults 4159424285 Cote eed wane etek eme edt 261 LS Adapter vaseseetkesiept e tte eus oe D gu EUR EEEO EY 262 Reset Bubtofio sos eR T M EE RR ERR CIR pU P PUERTA dase 265 1715 Digital Input Module enr HL erre e RR rrene 266 1715 Digital Output Modules e eve ret aite rera 268 1715 Analog Input Module 5 4 ur tee Wasa as 270 1715 Analog Output Module cement retener Rmth en 272 Appendix B Threshold Values for Digital Inputs ce recht rns 275 Threshold Diagnostics Settings lt 5 cereo ere tire eee 277 Calculate Threshold and Res
208. ie voveo tita m O cut mares 13 Additional Resources i onsen sade ade E E E XN QAAE 14 Chapter 1 Redundanel7 153A dapIeESu d Oei mite diee I od teste cR e da 15 1715 I O Modules uos vro ertt REPE ERA aad 16 1715 I O Modules in SIL 2 Applications suus 16 Systera ArcDuteett o sso oou s Pe RE ROSE NAA UATETS RUN EU d ans 16 Termin donNssenablies is cecus n Tee Etre ete thon eds 16 Base Unit Str ctuie sioe se eee br Meu e Te E aem 17 1715 AENTR Adapters 4212 err ERR ETHER E eae 17 POM MOdUIES iet et etico tede aifvatte Erbe qa ER ete ES 17 Module Positioning in the 1715 Redundant I O System 18 Layout the bard wanes sax urne eeu guuDU uS ee ete Seb ee 20 System Context S Jain 33 eU rath tens a AR RR P NE PED ans 20 Simplex Arohitebture des icut eh edere Serv uu Ih ep EET pee 22 Duplex Architecture uus etie ted eek duoc tan Peace cauta 23 Mixed Architeckite qos ERE eR ee LUE So e a NO eda 25 B s Diagrami nananana tap Edu da lt separateness 26 Switchover Considerations i dels c eye En Ree o aea 27 Obtaining a New IP Addresses err erre dep es 28 Ethernet Topology 2x veseturi rm ovre Uu a nie RS Ot ESSE 29 Communication on the EtherNet IP Network 30 System Perfofthali e x eoo See tree ok ba tuse etie ti d eei 31 Connections 3435 detec a Ge Ra e ee eer A A RS 31 TPT eta ED A SEEE E E A E E Lipa id 32 Connection and Data Format 2c vase dr eret E e heed 32 Chapter 2 Environment and Enclosure
209. ils Choose between Unicast and Multicast for EtherNet IP connections Use only Multicast in redundancy applications or else the connection drops upon switchover Make sure that the box is unchecked Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 177 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System 7 Click the Module Info A Tab The Module Info A tab appears xi General Connection Module Info B Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Identification Status Vendor Major Fault Product Type Minor Fault Product Code Internal State Revision Serial Number Configured Product Name Owned Module Identity Status Creating Cancel Help The Module A Info Tab displays module and status information about the primary adapter in slot 0 or 1 During initial setup the primary adapter is installed in slot 0 Ifan IP address swap occurs the primary adapter is now in slot 1 This tab also lets you reset a module to its power up state The information on this tab is not displayed if you are one of the following e Offline e Currently creating a module Table 25 Module Info A Parameters Parameters Description Identification Displays the module s Vendor Product Type Product Code Revision Serial Number Product Name Status Major Fault Minor Fault Major Minor Fault P 7 Displays the fault type Displays the fau
210. implex duplex connections and fault tolerant applications e Independent galvanically isolated input channels e Built in diagnostic testing and independent watchdog facility e Module removal and replacement online and when in Duplex mode no interruption of the signal inputs The internal isolated power supply from the 24V DC dual redundant system power inputs produces module power The isolated power supply provides power to the module and is protected by over voltage and undervoltage detection circuits Supply voltage monitoring initiates a warning signal and Power off Protection mode when a power failure is detected Internal diagnostics test the module at routine intervals An independent watchdog arrangement also monitors the module operation and provides more fault containment by activating a shutdown mechanism when a fault is detected IMPORTANT __ Ifa fault occurs during normal operation in a duplex configured system an input module can be removed and replaced without disrupting the input signals to a live system 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 The adapter also monitors the input data paths and can detect faults within each input channel A visual indication of the module status and individual channel status is provided by an array of front panel indicators and can be connected to application variables and viewed in the Logix Designer applicatio
211. in the process can dictate when the reconfiguration takes place rather than you performing that function manually The1715 modules support sending a MSG instruction of type Module Reconfigure This MSG instruction can be sent to a module to reconfigure it without stopping the module Use a MSG instruction of type Module Reconfigure to send new configuration information to an I O module During the reconfiguration the following occurs e Input modules continue to send input data to the controller e Output modules continue to control their output devices The following steps are used in this example when reconfiguring a module via ladder logic 1 Move new configuration parameters to the Configuration portion of the tag structure that is associated with the module 2 Usea message instruction to send a Reconfigure Module service to the same module Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Reconfigure a Module Online Appendix C Message Configuration Reconfig x Configuration Communication Tag Message Type Module Reconfigure Update module configuration without interrupting the connection O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 O Error Code Extended Error Code Timed Out Error Path Error Text Cancel Apply Help Before the new configuration parameters are sent to the module you must make sure that their relationship to each other is in
212. information on faults see the Using ControLogix in SIL 2 Safety Applications Reference Manual IMPORTANT The preferred way to meet this controller requirement in a 1715 SIL 2 system is to configure both the PROGRAM MODE and FAULT MODE tables for the 1715 0B8DE and 1715 OF8I with safe state values Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 231 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications This handles all fault scenarios e Ifa controller fault such as a watchdog fault occurs the controller goes to program mode which causes the 1715 I O to go to the Program Mode states e If there is a system fault that causes a communications loss to the I O modules then the 1715 I O goes to the Fault Mode states e Ifthereisa CRTL Connection Reaction Time Limit timeout in the 1715 AENTR adapter then the 1715 output modules go to the Fault Mode states For the 1715 OB8DE the configuration is found under the Fault Program Action tab E Module Properties AENTR6 1715 OBSDE 2 1 oles General Connection SIL2 Safety Module Info A Modue Info B Input States When CRTL Expires Configuration Fault Program Action For the 1715 OFS8L the configuration is found under the Fault Program Action tab Module Properties AENTR 12 1715 OF81 2 1 fol amp General Connection SIL2 Safety Module Info A Module Into B Input States When CRTL Expiees Configuratio
213. ion Status Entries Unable to service BOOTP request from 0 00 BC 21 40 55 0 of 256 5 Enter the MAC address that you found at the top of the label on the adapter backplane 6 Double click the hardware MAC address of the module to be configured The New Entry window appears Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 127 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 7 Enter the MAC address in the Ethernet Address MAC field DINE x Ethernet Address MAC 00 A0 EC 00 24 8C IP Address 0 0 0 0 Hostname Description DK Cancel 8 Enter the IP address that you want to use in the IP address field Ethemet Address MAC 00 A0 EC 00 24 8C IP Address 130 151 217 3 Hostname Description Cancel 9 Click OK IMPORTANT IP addresses can be recovered if needed in the Module Properties tab e The second adapter rightmost has a MAC address that is the first adapter s leftmost MAC address 2 in HEX 10 Click Disable BootP DHCP to set from dynamic to static Step 2 Configure the Module with RSLinx Classic Software To use RSLinx Classic software to configure the adapter on the Ethernet network follow these steps 1 Launch RSLinx Classic software 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 2 From the Communica
214. ion Duplex Configuration Description PFDde PFDe 7 53E 04 PFDde 2 19E 06 PFDe 3 73E 06 1715 IB16D 16 channel digital input module 2 57E 05 2 12E 06 2 21E 06 1715 IF16 16 channel analog input module 1 71E 05 2 57E 05 2 12E 06 2 21E 06 1715 0B8DE 8 channel digital output module 6 64E 06 1 93E 04 1 33E 05 1 97E 06 1715 0F8l 1 Calculated MTBF and PFD by FMEA to 61508 2000 2 For the latest approved versions see the Revision Release List available from the Product Certifications link at http www ab com 8 channel analog output module De energize to trip 5 Year Proof Test Interval Table 66 De energize to trip 5 Year Proof Test Interval 742E 04 2 50E 05 1 70E 05 MTTR 10 Hours PTI 5 0 Years Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration z 3 8 3 Is s 5 JES 8 lz e e le 3 t Z v le Ss a zis a a a a o a a Br a a a 1715 A 2 001 Ethernet ex Cx AENTR adapter EN 5 2 FE 2 Is g dual w mn o 5 mn mn mn uu a m N E E e e cel e module eo m Ss 3 a S u Ea 3 B a eo a wo ea ea N pem oo 1715 A 2 001 16 IB16D channel diia e ja e 8 e js i 2 e js a input R S N Ed c 2 IN mS X wm JA ES Ja S dule uA o S IR fe jo J S ss s S mo wo nm an we ce N ce Mo s E N v N 1715 A 2 001 16 IF16 channel analog e a jg 8 22
215. ion and removal of modules does not disturb other electrical connections Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 77 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Mount Termination Assemblies Termination assemblies connect to I O base units You can fit three simplex assemblies or one duplex and one simplex assembly The combination that is used depends on the specific configuration requirements of your system To connect termination assemblies to I O base units follow these steps 1 Insert the termination assembly TA retaining clip on the back of the termination assembly into the slot on the I O base unit 2 Press in and slide the assembly upward as far as it goes until it locks in place Q S I O base unit Pd 7 Termination assembly 32061M Tabs 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 3 Make sure the retaining tab clips over the circuit board to secure the TA in w S W Termination assembly Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Mount 1 0 Expansion Cable The expansion cable assembly connects an I O base unit to another I O base unit or to the adapter base unit It lets extra I O to be added at another location for example on another DIN rail The cable is 2 m long and provides connection for up to 24 I O mo
216. ion tab see page 197 Click OK Nw 0 d OQ The I O configuration folder of your project now looks similar to this amp 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fa 0 1756 L61 Redundant_IO_System jg 1 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr Glas Ethernet g 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module 9 1715Redundant J 0 1715 AENTR A Adapter Module g 2 1715 IB16D 4 Digital Input Module Redundant g 4 1715 IB16D A Digital Input Module Simplex g 5 1715 OB8DE A Digital Output Module Redundant B8DE A Digital Output Module Simplex g 1756 EN2TR CLX Ethernet module en2tr m D Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 199 200 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Add a 1715 IF16 Analog In this section you do the following Input Module to the Project e Adda 1715 IF16 analog input module in Duplex mode to the project e Adda 1715 IF16 analog input module in Simplex mode to the project Step 1 Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module in Duplex Mode Add a 1715 IF16 Analog Input module in Duplex mode to the project 1 Add the new module see page 186 The Select Module dialog box appears Select Module xj Allen Bradley 1715 OF8I 8 Channel Current Analog Output Isolated Allen Bradley Digital Find Add Favorite By Category By Vendor Favorites tee re 7Z 2 Expand the Analog module list select the 1715
217. ions that are listed previously are imported The CRC_calculator instruction calculates the CRC for incoming packets and compares the result against the actual CRC received in the packet The instruction also calculates the CRC that is placed in the outgoing packet SIL 2 check data is added to data packets by the producer and the consumer verifies this check data to determine the validity of the data transfer For input data from the 1715 modules the 1715 AENTR adapter is the producer and the ControlLogix controller is the consumer The 1715 AENTR adapter adds the check data and the Add On Instructions verify that valid data is received within the connection reaction time limit CRTL of the module If valid data is not received within the CRTL the instruction substitutes the configured safe state values of the module in place of the invalid data For output data to the 1715 modules the ControlLogix controller is the producer and the 1715 AENTR adapter is the consumer The Add On Instructions add SIL 2 diagnostic information check data to the module assemblies including a sequence number source and destination IDs and CRC The 1715 AENTR adapter verifies that valid data is received within the CRTL Outputs are placed into the safe state if the CRTL expires The 1715 input modules send data only in one direction from the 1715 AENTR adapter to the ControlLogix controller In contrast for the 1715 output modules data is sent in both direc
218. is invalid ChDuplex 0 7 Array of structure Array of 8 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0 7 0 Data 1 Faults ReadBack REAL Input data Faults DINT bit field Channel fault status Bit Name Description 0 Fault 0 Good 1 Circuit fault for this channel 1 ModAFault 0 Good 1 Fault or Module A not present 2 ModBFault 0 Good 1 Fault or Module B not present 4 InHold 5 NotANumber 6 LAlarm 7 HAlarm 8 RateAlarm Status DINT bit field Redundancy and power status Bit Name Description 0 ModAFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 1 ModBFault 0 Good 1 Fault or module not present 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel on module is faulted failed 9 ModAGroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel on Module A is faulted failed 10 ModuleBGroupFault 0 Good Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1 Any channel on Module B is faulted failed 317 AppendixF 1 0 Tag Definitions Notes 318 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Appendix G History of Changes Page 320 Topic 1715 UMOO1C EN P March 2014 This appendix summarizes the revisions to this manual Reference this appendix if you need information to determine what changes have been made across multiple revisions This information can be especially useful if you are deciding to upgrade your hardware or software that is based on information added w
219. is transferred between the ControlLogix controller and the 1715 modules via the 1715 AENTR adapter See Download and Import the Add On Instructions on page 239 As you proceed with this chapter be aware that when using the 1715 SIL 2 Add On Instructions you do not read inputs directly from the input table nor do you write directly to the output tags You read inputs from an Add On Instruction tag that is called reconciled input data and write outputs to an Add On Instruction tag called requested output data There is an Add On Instruction that is required for the 1715 AENTR adapter as well The status data from the 1715 AENTR adapter must be validated by using this Add On Instruction You cannot view the logic of each Add On Instruction because it is source protected Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 233 Chapter7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Table 40 SIL 2 Add On Instructions Module System Configuration Add On Instruction Name 1715 IB16D Simplex IB16D Simplex SIL2 Duplex IB16D Duplex SIL2 1715 OB8DE Simplex OB8DE_Simplex_SIL2 Duplex OB8DE_Duplex_SIL2 1715 IF16 Simplex IF16 Simplex SIL2 Duplex IF16 Duplex SIL2 1715 0F8l Simplex OF8I Simplex SIL2 Duplex OF8I Duplex SIL2 1715 AENTR Duplex AENTR_SIL2 An additional Add On Instruction called CRC_calculator is automatically imported when any of the nine Add On Instruct
220. istor Values 00 cee eee e ee 280 Calculate the Voltage for Off On Conditions for Threshold Values 281 Calculate On Off Condition for Resistor Values 285 Calibration Drift Checks sees 287 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic to Reconfigure an I O Module 289 Reconfigure a Module Via Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application 289 Reconfigure a Module Via Ladder Logic suuuu 290 Appendix D About PFD and PFH Calculations el esee ee ee eee 293 Determine Which Values to Use esee 293 Calculations for 1715 I O Modules 00 e eee eee eee eee 294 PFD Calculations with 10 hour MTTR 0008 295 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 SIL 2 Applications Checklist 1 0 Tag Definitions History of Changes Index Table of Contents PFD Calculations with 24 hour MTTR eee eee 301 Appendix E 1715 VO Modules s erede aat ce de e p ER ER D ol otal ttt 307 Appendix F I7 1S NENCERCAGADESE Cer eed eau eise US pe Dee tp e rnt ERE 309 715 IDIOD ooo Mec E feb Ces ache eee CCo 311 I715 OBSDE c uv tucUEH T EGER e A C C eg 312 ISP A E tue eer aee qus etu Metas vette 314 I715 OPBSLI a ee eer nieren e tenes deal his AN ES 316 Appendix G 1715 UMO001 C EN P Match 2014 3 icy cae EIE SE ELEME IE ELE eS 320 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 11 Table of Conte
221. it from the Custom Thresholds column General Connection Module Info A Module InfoB Config Enable Enable Change of State of State Diagnostics alr Off On eg Thresholds 2 Iv Iv d v 3 Enter the desired value ranges into the Threshold dialog boxes Edit Custom Thresholds E Thresholds mz Cancel Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 279 AppendixB 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Calculate Threshold and Resistor Values 280 To arrive at the correct diagnostic settings you must know one of the two values either the threshold values or the resistor values and then calculate the other set of values from the known values The following example shows a typical EOL arrangement for an Emergency Shutdown Device Figure 74 Field Loop Circuit for Line Monitored Digital Input for Emergency Shutdown Systems ESD 24V DC Termination I i Assembly R1 i re e I 4 99kQ Fd R2 NE ly 50 mA U l 1000 Shield if used e am Ed 200 Termina Blocks o 45678 OV You must realize that by virtue of R1 and R2 in combination with the internal impedance and field switch position of the module various voltage levels are produced at the input terminal that the threshold values can characterize Knowi
222. ith previous revisions of this manual Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 319 AppendixG History of Changes 1715 UM001C EN P March 2014 320 Change Updates to include SIL 2 operations with L7 ControlLogix controllers Studio 5000 Logix Designer application added throughout document and new information about who can use this system Using ControlLogix in SIL 2 Applications Safety Reference Manual added to Additional Resources section Added redundant 1715 adapter and status indicator information Added information to use a 1715 system ina SIL 2 application Corrected drawing added 1756 L7 controller and 1756 RM2 module added reference for DLR topologies Corrected drawing added 1756 L7 controller and 1756 RM2 module Network status indicator information CIP messages Required connections for duplex and simplex operation Listen Only connections Conformal coating is available on all 1715 modules 1715 A2A adapter base unit fuse graphic and removal and replacement information Digital input termination assembly removal and replacement of fuses Digital output termination assembly removal and replacement of fuses Analog input termination assembly removal and replacement of fuses Power requirements 1715 chassis firmware update power recycle needed ControlFLASH revision number Power requirements for PELV SELV Correction to system power graph
223. kQ which changes the voltage slightly but not enough to cause the range to change Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Appendix B Off Condition For an off condition we must add a resistor to the formula We already know that R2 is 3 9 kQ so we can use that too 5V DC 24V DC i e t Termination eo I Assembly sn Sy lm yt e i Fd 3 9kQ T Vy V l hield Fa e Terminal Blocks MR ET Ri MR R2 VIN _ 5100 24 39K 5 45684 R1 154K In this example 15 4 kQ is a close standard value so we use 15 kQ which changes the voltage slightly but not enough to make us change our range Calibration Drift Checks The 1715I O analog modules are calibrated at the factory with a default calibration As time passes the electrical specifications of various electronic components of your analog module drift To make sure the best possible accuracy in measurements that your analog input module makes and signals that your analog output module generates are maintained it is recommended to perform a calibration drift check every two years for most applications Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 287 AppendixB 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Although the purpos
224. l Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 123 Chapter2 Installation Instructions The status indicators listed in Table 13 illuminate The table is a quick installation reference For more detailed status indicator information see Appendix A Table 13 Start up Sequence 1715 AENTR Adapter Indicator Status Module Status Steady green Redundancy Status Flashes then steady green Network Status Off Rack Status Off then steady green Ethernet 1 Dependent on Ethernet connection status Ethernet 2 Dependent on Ethernet connection status 8 Turn the locking screw on the front of the module a 1 4 turn clockwise to lock by using a 9 mm screwdriver Each module has a locking screw that secures it to its base unit The module has an interlock that detects when a module is locked or unlocked IMPORTANT Modules run only in the locked position ADAPTER 1715 AENTR Allen Bradley Module Status Redundancy Status Network Status Rack Status 1 4 Turn 32083 M For information about the functionality of the Reset button see Reset Button on page 257 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Assign an IP Address Before you can use the hardware you must assign an IP address to the primary adapter This is done by associating an IP address to the MAC address of the primary hardware component in this case the adapter base uni
225. l be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation e Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 140 of the rated voltage when applied in Zone 2 environments e This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified Rockwell Automation Termination Assemblies e Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous e Enclosure must be marked with the following Warning Do not open when energized After installation of equipment into the enclosure access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 35 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Equipment or Protective System intended for use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94 9 EC Type Examination Certificate Number DEMKO 11 ATEX 7928686X Rev 1 Equipment Programmable Logic Controller Models 1715 AENTR Processor 1715 A2A Dual Processor Backplane 1715 A3IO I O Backplane 1715 IB16D Digital Input 1715 IF16 Analog Input 1715 OF8I Analog Output 1715 OB8DE Digi
226. l per channel for channels 0 15 l 1715 0B8DE 0 Normal 1 Indicates indeterminate input voltage detected This section describes the tags that are associated with the 1715 OB8DE module Table 77 8 channel Digital Output Simplex Output Tag Name Data Type Definition Data SINT Output channel commanded data one bit per channel for channels 0 7 0 Off de energize 1 On energize AlarmUnlatch SINT Unlatch alarm one bit per channel for channels 0 7 rising edge transition that is 0 1 ResetBlownFuse SINT Reset blown electronic fuse one bit per channel for channels 0 7 rising edge transition that is 07 1 resets Table 78 8 channel Digital Output Simplex Input Tag Name Fault Data Type DINT Binary Definition Module fault bit 0 when a module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no module is present no Logix connection exits or reported data is invalid ReadBack 312 SINT Output channel read back state one bit per channel for channels 0 7 0 Off de energized Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Table 78 8 channel Digital Output Simplex Input l OTag Definitions Appendix F Tag Name Data Type Definition 1 On energized Status DINT bit field Redundancy and power status Bit Name Description 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel or module faulted failed
227. lication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Table of Contents Step 1 Add a 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module in Duplex Mode 205 Step 2 Add a 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module in Simplex Mode 209 Chapter 6 SIL 2 Safety Application Requirements eseeeeeeeese 212 1715 I O Modules in SIL 2 Safety Applications 212 Typical Configurations cuu oa tyr Rex S naa da eed PUR NR UEES 214 Internal Diagnostiess esee rre Rr rhe ee ex sates ees 216 Power Supplies oes sakes cat rd ued an ds ae Vets tia oes uut 216 Requirements for Using 1715 I O Modules 0 085 217 En rgize to actron Requirements 22 5 erts cob ee shew cranes 217 Requirements for ControlLogix based SIL 2 Applications 218 Add On Instructions uos s ocstcetee ete eot eer o oa SOR 218 Connection Reaction Time Limit 0 0 cece eee ees 218 Using the 1715 Adapter in SIL 2 Applications 005 218 Reaction to PAE aN Scare arn occhi e eu c ees ceeded wg 219 Using 1715 I O Modules in SIL 2 Applications suse 219 Input Modules odas cec detested tad meas oxi Bieten xU 219 Considerations for Sensor and Actuator Configurations 223 Configure SIL 2 Opetduob sax iia Eri ea mene ort enmex EE ETE al 223 Enable SIE 2 Operations 7 2 20 copvssbeb aupra M a vehe dunes 224 S
228. lication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 115 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Connect the network cables to the sockets on the 1715 A2A adapter base unit To connect the adapter to the Ethernet network follow these steps 1 Insert the RJ45 modular jack on the cable into the appropriate socket for each network connection 2 Make sure that the length of the cable does not exceed 100 m 328 ft 32097 M Module Ke ing Module keying or polarization prevents the wrong module from being inserted y G A into the wrong base unit Modules are supplied with coding pegs that are already fitted so the modules are already keyed Electronic Keying is used within the Logix Designer application See Electronic Keying on page 120 for more information Figure 55 Module Coding Peg Sockets and Positions OOS Ov O Coding Peg Socket Coding Peg Positions 32085 M 32062M 116 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 The legend for the coding pegs showing the peg positions is shown on the lower left ofthe adapter base unit and on each I O termination assembly The positions are numbered 1 6 The three coding pegs are lettered A B and C with A being on the top Each peg or key is fitted in the base unit so that the index recess is next to the relevant numbered position See Figure 56 Table 12 Allocations
229. log output module 1715 OF8I 131 157 add 204 duplex mode 205 field wire 112 performance criteria 158 simplex mode 209 status indicators 272 termination assembly 60 architecture duplex 23 mixed 25 simplex 22 assembly tools System 47 assign IP address 125 base unit 17 before you begin 46 BOOTP 125 button change 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 323 Index 324 C cable assembly 80 Cathe 115 shielded twisted pair 115 calculations 5 year PFD 295 297 299 PFD 293 calibration 287 calibration drift checks analog 1 0 module 287 Cat5e cable 115 change button 176 change of state digital module 146 change of state trigger digital module 31 channel 208 fault 260 chassis size 176 checklist SIL 2 307 CIP EtherNet IP network 30 255 SIL2 16 coding pegs 118 module 117 commanded values 222 compatibility digital output module 141 configuration redundant 1 0 system 163 tab 196 202 configuration signature 1715 228 configure adapter 173 controller 169 connection 177 data 176 listen only 176 power 86 connection reaction time limit 1715 systems 218 224 225 connection wire ground 88 connections 31 consumer 234 ControlFLASH software 13 64 controller 15 configure 169 controller reaction time limit CRTL 307 create new project RSLogix 5000 programming software 167 CRTL controller reaction time limit 307 cydic trigger adapter 31 analog 1 0 module 31 data co
230. lt type Internal State Displays the module s current operational state Configured Displays a yes or no value which indicates whether the module has been configured by an owner controller who is connected to it Once a module has been configured it stays configured until the module is reset or power is cycled even if the owner drops connection to the module This information only applies to 1 0 modules and does not apply to adapters scanners bridges or other communication modules 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 Table 25 Module Info A Parameters Parameters Description Owned Displays a yes or no value indicating whether an owner controller is connected to the module Module Identity Displays If the physical mode is Match Agrees with what is specified on the General Tab For the Match condition to exist these must agree Vendor Module Type the combination of Product Type and Product Code for a particular Vendor Major Revision Mis match Does not agree with what is specified on the General Tab Reset Click Reset to return a module to its power up state by emulating the cycling of power Refresh Module Click Refresh Module to refresh the tab with new data from the module 8 Click che Module Info B tab The Module Info B tab appears Ill New Module 3 X General Connection Module Info A Intemet Protocol Port Co
231. ly while power is applied an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed before proceeding WARNING Do not remove or replace fuses when energized This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 North American Hazardous Location Approval The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class Division 2 Groups A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code lowest T number be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your System are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation Informations sur l utilisation de cet quipement en environnements dangereux Les produits marqu s CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qu une utilisation en environnements de Classe Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque pro
232. m 8 82 x 3 31 x 1 18 in 1 0 module base unit 233 x 126 x 18 mm 9 25 x 5 x 0 75 in Module 166 x 42 x 118 mm 6 5 x 1 625 x 4 625 in The total depth of a base unit and module is 136 mm 5 375 in Figure 23 Module Dimensions All module dimensions are the same whether they are adapters or I O modules 118mm gt 42mm 4 65in 1 65in pes 32067M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Table 7 Component Weights Be sure that the mounting assembly can support the weight of the components by using this table Cat No Component Weight g oz 1715 A2A Adapter base unit 283 9 98 1715 A310 1 0 base unit 220 7 76 1715 AENTR Adapter 420 14 82 1715 IB16D Digital input module 360 12 70 1715 IF16 Analog input module 360 12 70 1715 0B8DE Digital output module 290 10 23 1715 0F8l Analog output module 340 11 99 1715 TASIB16D Digital input simplex termination assembly 133 4 69 1715 TADIB16D Digital input duplex termination assembly 260 9 17 1715 TASIF16 Analog input simplex termination assembly 133 4 69 1715 TADIF16 Analog input duplex termination assembly 260 9 17 1715 TASOB8DE Digital output simplex termination assembly 133 4 69 1715 TADOB8DE Digital output duplex termination assembly 260 9 17 1715 TASOF8I Analog output simplex termination assembly 133 4 69
233. mation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Connect the Adapter to the Ethernet Network Installation Instructions Chapter 2 The adapter supports DLR Ring and Star topologies For more details on topologies see System Architecture on page 16 IMPORTANT For wiring details see Table 11 The adapter has four autosensing 10 100BASE TX Ethernet ports for connecting to a local area network through a minimum Cat5e shielded twisted pair STP Ethernet cable There are two ports for each adapter IMPORTANT The 1715 Redundant I 0 System requires the use of a minimum Cat5e shielded twisted pair STP Ethernet cable The adapter Ethernet ports are on the 1715 A2A adapter base unit and are identified in this table Table 11 Allocation of 10 100BASE TX Ports to Adapters 1715 AENTR Adapter 10 100BASE TX Ports Adapter A A1 A2 Adapter B where present B1 B2 IMPORTANT Most network connections use straight through cables Crossover cables are not needed due to the intelligence or functionality of the switch If a direct connection is required from the adapter to the personal computer for example during setup it can be necessary to use a crossover cable This depends on the characteristics of the interface in the personal computer The fixed connectors on the adapter are female RJ45 modular jacks Use a minimum Cat5e shielded twisted pair STP cable with male RJ45 modular jacks for network cabling Rockwell Automation Pub
234. mination Assemb y 8 Channel Dual Analog Output Model 1715 A2A Dual Processor Backplane is for use with Model 1715 AENTR Processor Model 1715 A3IO I O Backplane is for use with all other Models Subject devices are all marked Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Temperature range Model 1715 AENTR The ambient temperature range is 25 C to 60 C All other Models The ambient temperature range is 25 C to 70 C Electrical Ratings Backplane Ratings Model SEES Vdc 9 Current fA Input Output Ratings 1715 A2A 18 32 10 4A 400mA per slot 1715 A3IO 18 32 9 6A 400mA per slot 1715 AENTR 18 32 380 1715 IB16D 18 32 260 Input 0 32Vdc 6 5 mA 1715 IF16 18 32 260 Input 18 32Vdc 24 mA 1715 OF8l 18 32 260 Output 18 32Vdc 0 20mA 1715 OB8DE 18 32 165 Output 18 32Vdc 0 5A Pilot Duty 16VA 1 5A Inrush 1715 TASIB16D 0 32 6 5 1715 TADIB16D 0 32 6 5 1715 TASIF16 18 32 0 24 1715 TADIF16 18 32 0 24 1715 TASOB8DE 18 32 500 1715 TADOB8DE 18 32 500 1715 TASOF8 18 32 0 24 1715 TADOF8 18 32 00 IC F0060 Issue 9 0 This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change schedule included Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Page 2 of 3 Chapter 2 37 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 13 Schedule 14 TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No DEMKO 11 ATEX 7928686X rev 1 Report 4786831849
235. modules also use more words to indicate fault conditions The table lists the tag that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard input module Description This word provides fault summary reporting its tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules DINT Fault Radix Binary 0 at least one module present FFFFFFFF No Logix connection Simplex Digital Input Module Additional Tags Include GroupFault BIT 1 if any point on the module is faulted failed PtFault INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 if point is faulted failed OpenWire INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 indicates open wire ShortCircuit INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 indicates short circuit Indeterminate INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 indicates indeterminate Duplex Digital Input Module Additional Tags Include ModAFault BOOL 0 Good 1 fault or module not present ModBFault BOOL 0 Good 1 fault or module not present GroupFault BOOL 1 if any point on either module is faulted failed ModAGroupFault BOOL 1 if any point on Module A is faulted failed ModBGroupFault BOOL lif any point on Module B is faulted failed PtFault INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 if point is faulted failed on both modules ModAPtFault INT Radix Binary 1 bit per Channel 0 15 1 if chan
236. ms User Manual publication ENET UMO01 for more information Ethernet Network We recommend that static IP addresses be assigned to EtherNet IP modules in Logix5000 control systems We recommend that you do not use dynamic IP addresses because if a power outage or other network failure occurs modules with dynamic IP addresses can be assigned new addresses when the failure is resolved If the IP addresses of modules change you could experience a loss of control or other serious complications with your system However if you must use the DHCP feature you can use the Stratix 8000 switch which can be configured to provide the same IP address to any given port See Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UMO01 for more information Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 173 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Step 2 Add the 1715 AENTR Adapter to the Project 1 In the Logix Designer project right click the Ethernet network icon in the I O Configuration folder and choose New Module amp Yo Configuration 3 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fa 0 1756 L61 Redundant IO System i 1 1756 EN2TR CLX_Ethernet_module_en2tr P l Paste Ctr V Print The Select Module dialog box appears Catalog Module Discovery Favorites Enter Search Text for Module Type Communication Communications Ad
237. must be used when using full or custom diagnostics 10 Click OK Step 2 Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module in Simplex Mode To add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input module in Simplex mode to the project follow these steps 1 Add the new module see page187 2 Select the 1715 IB16D Digital Input module see page 188 and click OK The General tab appears E Module Properties AENTR 2 1715 IB16D 2 1 General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Type 1715 IB16D 16 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent AENTR Name ibi6d Module A Slot 2 ModuleBSlot 3 Description Module Definition Revision zy Change Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Redundant Yes SIL2 Safety No Status Offline OK Cancel Apply Help 3 Enter the module name Notice that there are still two slot numbers that are displayed indicating that the module is in the default Duplex mode 192 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 4 Click Change The Module Definition dialog box appears 5 Change the module default from Redundant Yes to Redundant No to run the module in Simplex mode See page 189 for more setup information 6 Click OK A Verify Module Properties dialog box appears RSLogix 5000 E xl
238. n The termination assemblies can accept one or two input modules Each termination assembly provides passive signal load termination and over voltage protection for each input channel The system provides flexible input connectivity by mating specific termination assemblies with the relevant number of input modules Table 19 Performance Criteria for the Analog Input Module Attribute Value Data Input value least significant bit 0 98 uA Channel Measurement Error at 25 C 77 F 2 C 3 6 F After 1 year at 40 C 104 F 0 2196 10 uA After 2 years at 40 C 104 F 0 22 10 pA After 5 years at 40 C 104 F 0 23 10 uA Temperature drift 0 0196 0 3 pA per C 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module The analog output interface consists of analog output modules and output termination assemblies Each module provides eight isolated output channels and plugs into the I O base unit and a corresponding termination assembly Termination assemblies provide termination for eight output channels and the polarization coding pegs make sure they mate only with an analog output module Field connections are connected to the terminal block connectors on the termination assembly The analog module provides 4 20 mA output current from each channel for field devices The 1715 OF8I analog output module features are as follows e Flexible module structure for a user configurable system e Supports eight field devices e Secur
239. n Limits Faui Progiam Action a 2 a oof g 3 How inst state 00 Houisistote ell oo Program Mode Hote inst state aoj Mold inst state mi oo ProgramMode e honestae ef oo frores ej 00 D f erogram moge m 5L at fees Additional Resources For more information on using 1715 I O modules in SIL 2 applications see the following resources e Chapter 7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant I O Modules on page 233 e Appendix E PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System on page 293 e Appendix F SIL 2 Applications Checklist on page 307 e ControlLogix Controllers in SIL 2 Applications publication 1756 RM001 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Chapter 7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant I 0 Modules Topic Page SIL 2 Add On Instructions Overview 233 SIL 2 Check Data 237 Add On Instruction Inputs 238 Add On Instruction Outputs 238 Download and Import the Add On Instructions 239 Configure an Input Module Add On Instruction 244 Configure an Output Module Add On Instruction 248 Using the Add On Instruction Data Tags in an Application Program 252 Performing a SIL 2 Reset 253 SIL 2 Add On Instructions IMPORTANT Toachieve SIL2 with 1715 1 0 modules in a ControlLogix system you must use Overview these Add On Instructions The SIL 2 Add On Instructions verify the validity of data that
240. n 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 Wi Module Properties cvsdvsc O 1715 AENTR 2 1 f x In General Connection SIL Safety Module Info A Module Info B Intenet Protocol Port Configuration Network Note Use of the SIL2 Safety option requires specific data handling measures within your application program Connection Type RPl ms CRTL ms Max Observed Delay ms SIL2 Reset Needed The default value for the CRTL is 10 000 ms The valid range is 1000 60 000 ms Considerations for Setting the CRTL The value of the CRTL forms part of the safety considerations for the system You are responsible for calculating and verifying that the CRTL meets the safety reaction time for your safety function IMPORTANT Forinformation about how to configure the safety reaction time for your safety application see page 229 e Ina1715 system the CRTL value is assigned to individual modules during module configuration e Ifthe input CRTL is not met the controller presents fail safe input values to the application logic Each time a valid packet is received from an input module the controller resets the CRTL If the CRTL ever times out the controllers present fail safe input values to the application logic e Each time a valid packet is received from the controller the output module resets the CRTL If the CRTL ever times out the output module as
241. n Program mode and limited by Ramp Rate The default is cleared Ramp to Program Value is enabled excluding Hard Run mode when the Program mode is set to Use Program Value Ramp to Program Value is dimmed including Hard Run mode when the Program mode is set to Hold Last State Program Mode Communication Failure Output State Ramp Rate Choose the output state when there is communication failure in Program mode Program mode or Fault mode The default is Program mode Displays the Ramp Rate for the channel as it is displayed on the Module Properties dialog box Limits tab 1715 OF8I To change this value enter a Ramp Rate value on the Module Properties dialog box Limits tab 1715 OF8l Ramp Rate is enabled when online in the following Program mode Remote Program mode Remote Run mode 12 Click OK Step 2 Add a 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module in Simplex Mode 1 Add the new module see page 186 2 Select the 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module referring to step 2 on page 205 and click OK The General tab appears E Module Properties AENTR 12 1715 OFS8I 2 1 te Terras General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Limits Fault Program Action Type 1715 OF8I 8 Channel Current Analog Output Isolated Vendor Allen Bradley Parent AENTR Name Analog_Output_Duplex Module A Slot 12 v Module B Slot 13 Description Module Definition Module De
242. n its entirety and without any change schedule included Page 10f3 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 13 14 Schedule TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No DEMKO 11 ATEX 7928686X rev 1 15 Description of Equipment Report 4786831849 Installation Instructions These devices are low power open type programmable logic controllers that are intended for installation in an ultimate enclosure The 1715 Programmable Logic Controller Series consist of the following Models Model Description 1715 A2A Dual Processor Backplane 1715 A3IO I O Backplane 1715 AENTR Processor Module 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module 16 Channel 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module 16 Channel 1715 OF8l Analog Output Modu e 8 Channel 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module 1715 TASIB16D Termination Assemb y 16 Channel Simplex Digital Input TA 1715 TADIB16D Termination Assemb y 16 Channel Dual Digital Input TA 1715 TASIF16 Termination Assemb y 16 Channel Simplex Analog Input 1715 TADIF16 Termination Assemb y 16 Channel Dual Analogue Input 1715 TASOB8DE Termination Assemb y 8 Channel Simplex Digital Output 1715 TADOB8DE Termination Assemb y 8 Channel Dual Digital Output 1715 TASOF8 Termination Assemb y 8 Channel Simplex Analog Output 1715 TADOF8 Ter
243. nection over EtherNet IP Module Fault Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Parameter Requested Packet Interval RPI Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 1 Choose from the options in the Connection tab Description Enter an RPI value or use the default Inhibit Module Check the box to prevent communication between the owner controller and the module This option lets the module be maintained without faults being reported to the controller Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP 2 Click OK Check the box to create a major fault if there is a connection failure with the module while in Run mode For important information on this checkbox see Configure a Major Fault to Occur in the Logix5000 Controllers Information and Status Programming Manual publication 1756 PM015 Choose between Unicast and Multicast for EtherNet IP connections This checkbox is enabled when the module supports Unicast at the current revision and any part of the module path crosses EtherNet IP Itis checked and dimmed when the module supports only Unicast and any part of the module path crosses the EtherNet IP network The checkbox is not checked and dimmed if these conditions are true The current revision of the module does not support Unicast If a module is Multicast only no revision supports Unicast e The module is proxied fo
244. nel WS ran ran lt lt Polarizing Pins AH i ran nn ran EEE ran nn nn EEE A Polarizing 32094 Al SIMPLEX TA 32120M Pins Fuse Type Littelfuse No 396 TE5 50 mA Timelag Fuse UL 248 14 125V T Leadfree for Analog Input Termination Assemblies Use a pair of long nosed pliers for fuse removal and replacement See page 111 for detailed wiring instructions Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 59 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Analog Output Termination Assemblies Analog output termination assemblies support these features Eight output channels for a simplex duplex configuration Industry standard field device connections at the terminal blocks Analog output channels provide 4 20 mA DC for external field devices Duplex termination assembly provides increased fault tolerance for output channels There are two types of analog output termination assemblies A 1715 TASOFS 8 channel simplex TA that provides termination for 8 single ended analog output channels and mates with one 1715 OF8I 8 channel analog output module A 1715 TADOFS 8 channel duplex termination assembly provides fault tolerant operation for 8 analog output channels through inter module communication and by routing the output source current from two modules to the same field device IMPORTANT The dual termination assembly does this by supporting inter module communication f
245. nel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 92 Installation Instructions 1715 IF16 Digital Input Module Functional Block Diagram Figure 32 1715 IF16 16 channel Module Functional Block Diagram Termination Typical Circuit Assembly Dual Input r 1 Measurement t ___Isolator 1 0 Command Bus C Response Bus Ca PMA Commands e PMB Commands e a PM Commands Input Data i D Data Management fan P e nputData FPGA 1 0 Backplane Module Status Front Panel LEDS e Channel Status WRRERRERRERREREEREERERNEREEA o L Ld Measurement Isolator PWR Power Valid I SYS_24V1 Dual Redundant SYS 24V2 Over Under 9 PWR System Voltage Power SYS_OV H gt Protection Power Valid 32106 M Figure 32 provides a Function Block Diagram of the 1715 digital input module illustrating the input circuits isolation circuits internal power supplies and the input data management by the FPGA Each input signal is routed through a termination assembly to two input measurement devices These devices determine the input status and channel condition and generate the input data for the ControlLogix controller The digital input module recei
246. nel has failed on module A ModBPtFault INT Radix Binary 1 bit per Channel 0 15 1 if channel has failed on module B 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Digital 1 0 Operation Chapter 3 Tag Description OpenWire INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 indicates open wire ShortCircuit INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 indicates short circuit Indeterminate INT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 15 1 indicates indeterminate Module fault Word All Modules Bit 31 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for the density of each module are used Condition Set Bits Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density This illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix standard digital input modules Bit 0 Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 42676 A communication fault sets all bits in the module fault word The 1715 digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any owner listening controllers All output modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use more words to indicate fault conditions The table lists the tags that can be examined in ladd
247. nfiguration Network Identification Status Vendor Major Fault Product Type Minor Fault Product Code Internal State Revision Serial Number Configured Product Name Dwned Module Identity Status Creating Cancel Help The Module B Info Tab displays module and status information about the secondary adapter in slot 0 or 1 During initial setup the secondary adapter is installed in slot 1 If an IP address swap occurs the secondary adapter is now in slot 0 This tab also lets you reset a module to its power up state The information on this tab is not displayed if you are one of the following e Offline e Currently creating a module Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 179 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System See Table on page 178 9 Click the Internet Protocol tab You must be online to configure the Internet Protocol settings 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 The Internet Protocol tab appears 10 x lll Module Properties RCP EK T 508 A002 0 1715 AENTR 1 1 General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Internet Protocol IP Settings IP settings can be manually configured or can be automatically configured if the network supports this capability Manually configure IP settings C Obtain IP
248. ng the resistor values allows you to calculate the voltage levels to arrive at the threshold settings Use Figure 75 and Figure 76 and the resistor values you choose to determine how the system responds to various field wiring conditions so that the threshold values can be set For our example we used the resistor values in Table 58 on page 278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Appendix B Calculate the Voltage for Off On Conditions for Threshold Values The following examples calculate the voltage for an off condition with the switch opened and closed Open Switch Off Condition With SW 1 open current flows through R1 and R2 15 3 9 ko 18 9 ko We can calculate the voltage that is present at the input of the input module and by using a voltage divider circuit we can calculate the voltage for an off condition Figure 75 Open Switch Off Condition User calculated Voltage 24V DC 15kQ uH m i Termination e Y l f i Assembly l wo 2 fafao 51KO QMEE Fog 3940 te m tg Vg l Y Shield if used e Termina Blocks 45678 18 9K E 24 54k E 189 Vin 24 18 9 a Vin 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 281 AppendixB 1715 IB16D Digital In
249. nnection 176 echo output 147 format connection 32 transfer 143 de energize to trip 152 219 power supply 216 DHCP BOOTP IP address 28 diagnostic latching 149 diagnostic features 255 1715 AENTR 255 1715 IB16D 255 1715 IF16 256 1715 0B8DE 256 1715 0F8l 256 diagnostics 1715 SIL 2 safety 228 digital input module 138 1715 IB16D 131 add 186 duplex mode 187 recommended circuits 90 SIL2 189 simplex mode 192 status indicators 266 tags 152 153 termination assembly 56 140 termination assembly wire 94 digital module 137 change of state 146 change of state trigger 31 features 140 RIUP 141 RPI 144 termination assembly 138 type 138 digital output module 139 1715 0B8DE 131 add 194 compatibility 141 duplex mode 195 features 139 field loop circuits 104 field wire 101 motor starters 141 recommended circuits 97 simplex mode 198 status indicators 268 termination assembly 58 141 disable alarms 208 DLR topology 29 dowel pin 123 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 duplex architecture 23 duplex mode analog output module 205 digital input module 187 digital output module 195 electronic keying 176 emergency stop devices ESD 293 enclosure 64 energize on communication failure 151 energize to action 217 219 Ethernet 173 adapter 115 topology 29 EtherNet IP network CIP 30 255 expansion cable 80 81 1715 A2A 85 1715 A310 83 1715 Q 62 ferrites 80 install 82 F fail safe guard 2
250. nstallation Instructions Chapter 2 IECEx Certificate of Conformity INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION IEC Certification Scheme for Explosive Atmospheres for rules and details of the IECEx Scheme visit www iecex com Certificate No IECEx UL 15 0032X issue No 0 Certificate history Status Current Date of Issue 2015 07 23 Page 1 of 3 Applicant Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley 1201 S 2nd Street Milwaukee WI 53204 United States of America Electrical Apparatus Programmable Logic Controllers Optional accessory Type of Protection Non Sparking nA Marking Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Modules 1715 AENTR 25 C to 60 C All other modules 25 C to 70 C Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Paul T Kelly Certification Body Position Principal Engineer Global Hazardous Locations m n rn ua AL ps Signature vU ou d f for printed version Date 2015 07 23 1 This certificate and schedule may only be reproduced in full 2 This certificate is not transferable and remains the property of the issuing body 3 The Status and authenticity of this certificate may be verified by visiting the Official IECEx Website Certificate issued by UL LLC 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook IL 60062 2096 United States of America Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 39 Chapter2 Installation Instructions IECEx Certificate of Conformity Certificate No IECEx UL 15 0032X Date
251. nts 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Before You Begin Preface This manual explains how to install and configure the 1715 Redundant I O System This redundant modular system is designed to work with a ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System This system provides fault tolerant I O and redundancy for use in critical process applications This manual is intended for the following individuals who Understand how to configure and use a ControlLogix System and a ControlLogix Enhanced Redundancy System Understand how to configure remote devices on an Ethernet IP network Before you begin using your 1715 Redundant I O System verify that you have the software that is required to install and configure your system Required Software This list identifies the minimum software versions that are required to use your 1715 Redundant I O System e RSLogix 5000 programming software version 19 e RSLogix 5000 programming software version 20 or later when using SIL 2 operations e RSLinx Classic software version 2 57 e Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or higher Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 32 and 64 bit and Microsoft Windows 2003 Server operating systems e ControlFLASH software revision 2 001 e Adapter Add on Profile at Product Compatibility and Download Center website e I O Modules Add on Profile at Product Compatibility and Download Center website ATTENTION
252. o potio eiie nn bg Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 125 128 131 134 135 137 138 139 140 140 140 141 141 141 141 142 142 142 143 143 143 144 146 146 147 147 147 148 149 151 151 152 152 152 153 155 156 157 158 Table of Contents Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUD 158 Module Fault Reporting ut edcovdvs debates os Ue erar qd ce 158 Fully Software Configurable 2 oui etes Sue ties ae 159 Status Indicator Information i35 utes ra dep rna OPER REIN 159 Module InhdDitilg 2554s 1 exe ene quud SV VATERS Er MSN tance 159 Sealing Er po REEF HEU e ed RUPEE C C I ee 160 Operating Modessoskeosesobi Gave uet inus ate iim intro e 161 Online Modes chives s ueri Sd da d ario o d utei do ata 161 Offline Modeos dorso ute Yo aver tepido opens 161 Shutdown Moderns deel age creme ees hof qi eo NIRE 161 Ready Mode meee sina neo cias deo odas uerus des eui 162 Pt Node obi esitare hak ated EE E die Sept icit Be 162 Shutdown Statessa a eus de Qo hie T ete A d E Rd ee d 162 Chapter 5 Detor X ow DEBInmcse iud eae mnn Ee eden Ade E ERE QU eds 163 Installthe SoftwWate c Corb KR Eau ue IH FANE ERR det 164 Install the Add on Profiles escis uto ek oda rore oor uus 164 If Installing from the CD iier en et ee ere vas 164 If Installing from the Product Compatibility and Download Center DW CUS E cocus a a a ciet EL Eon CAE T ae 164 E
253. o the terminal screws Table 10 Module Power Wiring Sizes Wiring Attribute Size Conductor cross section stranded maximum 25mm 12 AWG Conductor cross section solid maximum 2 5 mm 12 AWG Stripping length 7 mm 9 32 in For maximum protection be sure that the PWR 1 and PWR 2 plugs are supplied from independent 24V DC sources as in Figure 28 Only having one power supply plug connection causes a Rack Status fault status indicator to illuminate on adapters Figure 28 Independent Power Sources MP PWR 24V1 OV eee OV MP PWR 24V2 PWR 1 PWR2 32125M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 87 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Wire the Ground Connection The system can have up to three separate ground systems e An AC Safety Ground sometimes called the dirty ground to help protect you in the event of a fault The ground stud on the adapter base unit must be connected to the AC safety ground along with all exposed metalwork such as DIN rails e An Instrument Ground sometimes called the clean ground or OV DC ground to provide a good stable OV reverence for the system Every signal return must be referenced to the instrument ground which is isolated from the AC Safety Ground e Some field wiring needs shielded screened cable There can be a Shield Ground and the AC Safety and Instrument Grounds to provide a common point to terminate cable shields Connec
254. o three I O modules Up to 24 I O modules can be added to the system The system is built on DIN rails within a cabinet enclosure 1715 C2 expansion cables can be used to allow for space restrictions of the system within the cabinet IMPORTANT Conformal coating is standard on all 1715 modules 3 Module Status Network Status Rack Status Ethernet 1 Ethemet2 G ecccccce ce ee e e fe e A e ica e wal w le n le n je le e e 8 e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e H e O EQ N D Q channetos Q e Q Channetoo Q e QJH channet1o o e Q Owen Q e Q Chii Q e O H owes Q e OIF as o e o Gets o e 32065M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 49 Chapter2 Installation Instructions The general system layout for the 1715 Redundant I O System consists of the following hardware components 1715 AENTR Adapter Redundant Pair The 1715 adapter communicates via the EtherNet IP network to a 1756
255. odule 198 slot cover 62 install 134 slot positions 66 software installation 164 solenoids 141 star topology 21 static configuration 130 status indicators 143 159 259 adapter 262 analog input module 270 analog output module 272 digital input module 266 digital output module 268 status reporting 153 standard input modules 152 switchover considerations 27 system architecture 16 assembly tools 47 configuration 18 connection 31 example 18 hardware 49 layout 19 overview 15 parts 46 performance 31 power 86 software 64 T tags digital input module 152 153 termination assembly 16 1715 IF16 157 analog input module 59 analog output module 60 digital input module 56 140 digital module 138 digital output module 58 141 fuse 57 58 59 261 1 0 module 56 install 77 retaining clips 79 termination assembly wire digital input module 94 topology adapter 115 DLR 29 Ethernet 29 star 21 troubleshooting module status indicators 143 type digital module 138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 327 Index U ucer 234 unicast 145 unlatch 207 V value fault 208 W watchdog facility 138 wire adapter 86 ground 88 328 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com s
256. odules f E vv AENTR Adapter Modules lOM IOM E EHH Responses from I O Modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 To other I O modules Switchover Considerations Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 Each 1715 Redundant I O System uses one IP address as the primary IP address for all communication on the EtherNet IP network The redundant adapter pair consists of two active modules a primary adapter and its partner a secondary module For this document the primary module is referred to as module A and the secondary module is referred to as module B On power up the adapter in the leftmost slot is considered the primary module when two adapters are present because it uses the primary IP address and because it is the module responsible for receiving transmitting to ControlLogix controller on the EtherNet IP network The module in the rightmost slot is considered the secondary module partner and uses the primary IP address 1 For example if the primary module in the leftmost slot has an IP address of N then the secondary module in the rightmost slot has an IP address of N 1 Both modules are always active and are responsible for monitoring all inputs and outputs monitoring diagnostics in the system and reading and writing data from to I O simultaneously When the primary module receives
257. of Coding Pegs Mplaton Tel dMe8 we VisMaperBseUnt OS o n0 M s 1715 Digital Input Termination Assemblies 2 1 1 1715 Analog Input Termination Assemblies for analog input modules 2 1 3 1715 Digital Output Termination Assemblies for digital output modules 3 1 1 Figure 56 Inserted Coding Pegs 32064M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 117 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Verify Coding Pegs To verify that each coding peg also known as a polarizing pin is positioned correctly follow these steps 1 Review the diagram on the adapter base unit that shows the six possible positions for a coding peg 32062M 2 Examine a coding peg fitted and identify the index recess on the hexagonal flange Coding Peg 32063 M 118 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 3 See Table 12 and verify that each coding peg is fitted so its index recess is next to the relevant numbered position 32062M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 119 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Electronic Keying Electronic Keying reduces the possibility that you use the wrong device in a control system It compares the device that is defined in your project to the installed device If keying fails a fault occurs These attributes are compared Attribute Vendor Description The device manufac
258. of Issue 2015 07 23 Issue No 0 Page 2 of 3 Manufacturer Rockwell Automation Ltd Hall Road Maldon CM9 4LA United Kingdom Additional Manufacturing location s Oncore de Mexico S A de c V Blvd Hector Teran Teran 20120 Nave 7 Parque Industrial Prologis Mesa de Otay Tijuana B C 22444 Mexico This certificate is issued as verification that a sample s representative of production was assessed and tested and found to comply with the IEC Standard list below and that the manufacturer s quality system relating to the Ex products covered by this certificate was assessed and found to comply with the IECEx Quality system requirements This certificate is granted subject to the conditions as set out in IECEx Scheme Rules IECEx 02 and Operational Documents as amended STANDARDS The electrical apparatus and any acceptable variations to it specified in the schedule of this certificate and the identified documents was found to comply with the following standards IEC 60079 0 2011 Explosive atmospheres Part 0 General requirements Edition 6 0 IEC 60079 15 2010 Explosive atmospheres Part 15 Equipment protection by type of protection n Edition 4 This Certificate does not indicate compliance with electrical safety and performance requirements other than those expressly included in the Standards listed above TEST amp ASSESSMENT REPORTS A sample s of the equipment listed has successfully met the examination an
259. ogramming terminal is not normally connected ATTENTION Use care when changing the configuration of an 1 0 module You could inadvertently cause the 1 0 module to operate incorrectly Reconfigure a Module Via Studio 5000 Logix Designer Application To reconfigure a module perform this procedure 1 In the Logix Designer application right click a module in the I O Configuration tree and choose Properties ut p Cut Ctrlex tga Cop Ctrl C put EX Paste Ctri V put Delete Del Cross Reference Ctrl E Properties Alt Enter Print gt Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 289 Appendix C 290 Reconfigure a Module Online The Module Properties dialog box appears zug General Connection Module Info Configuration Type 1715 IB16D 16 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Adapter_Module Name Digital Input Module Simplex Description z p Module Definition Revision n Che Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Redundant No Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Reconfigure the I O module 3 Click OK Reconfigure a Module Via Ladder Logic It is sometimes advantageous to change the functional operation of a module in the ControlLogix system automatically via the user program instead of by using the Logix Designer application to reconfigure it This way changes
260. on Keep in mind that these are virtual chassis product numbers and not literal catalog numbers See the example in Figure 58 Figure 58 Virtual Chassis File Product Numbers Details amp Device Catal Major Minor 1 5 Allen Bradley Details Download Analog 1 0 1715 IF16 1715 IF16 Allen Bradley Details Download Analog 1 0 1715 OF8l 1715 OF8l 1 5 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A11 1715 A11 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A14 1715 A14 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A17 1715 A17 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A2 1715 A2 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A23 1715 A23 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A26 1715 A26 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A5 1715 A5 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Chassis 1715 A8 1715 A8 1 1 Allen Bradley Details Download Digital 1 0 1715 IB16D 1715 IB16D 1 5 i i i Once the Add on Profile is installed you are ready to create the RSLogix 5000 or reate the Project in RSLogix y y g Logix Designer project In this section you do the following 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Roc y 5 Designer e Create a project e Configure the 1756 controller in the project e Add the 1756 EN2TR module to the project Step 1 Create the New Project 1 Launch the application and start a new project for the 1715 Redun
261. on Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 23 Chapter 1 24 SENSORS Redundancy System Overview Figure 6 Duplex Architecture Inputs and Outputs ADAPTER ADAPTER VP FINAL ELEMENTS CIP NETWORK CLX 1715 IB16D 1715 F16 1715 F16 e eL Termination assemblies can span across I O base units Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Redundancy System Overview Chapter 1 Mixed Architecture There can be a mixture of architectures within one system Figure 7 shows simplex and dual I O configurations with dual processors Figure 7 Mixed Architecture SENSORS FINAL gt ELEMENTS SENSORS FINAL ELEMENTS FE o z p lu Zz a o CLX Y 1715 a715 TASIB16D TasoBspE Ji W AL 3 3j 1715 AENTR 1715 OB8DE E 1715 OB8DE Ww 1715 A3IO 45423 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 25 Chapter 1 26 Redundancy System Overview Bus Diagram A detailed drawing of the backplane is shown Figure 8 Figure 8 Bus Diagram of 1715 Redundant 1 0 System To network Commands to I O M
262. on page 188 Click Change Enter the parameters see page 189 Click OK Click the Connection tab see page 177 9 d O wn B Click the Module Info A tab see page 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 195 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System 9 Click the Module Info B tab see page 178 10 Click the Configuration tab The Configuration tab appears 3 Module Properties AENTR 6 1715 OB8DE 2 1 Lote Genera Connection Module info A Module Info B Configuration Faut Program Action qa No Load Point Detection Status Offline ok cancel Amy Hele Table 32 Configuration Parameters for Digital Output Module in Duplex Mode Parameters Point No Load Detection Description Click the point number to configure parameters for the specified point 0 7 By default the header checkbox is selected and all points 0 7 are selected If the header checkbox is cleared all points 0 7 are cleared To specify no load detection for a specific point check the checkbox in the appropriate row for that point To dear no load detection for a specific point clear the checkbox in the appropriate row for that point Latch No Load Diagnostics Choose if load fault alarms are latched until reset including Open Wire Detection and Short Circuit detection By default the header checkbox is select
263. onfig Data my1715adptr 2C CRC error AB 1715 DI Diagl amp SILZ C O Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 245 246 Chapter 7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules 5 Choose the module input tag a If you have multiple I O modules be sure to choose the input tag for the appropriate module Verify SIL2 check data is correct for incoming packets IB15D Duplex SIL2 Verify SIL2 check data is correct for incoming p Reset ResetTag 0e my 71 Sadptr 2 1 AB 1715 DM6 Diag Duplex SILZ I O IB16D Duplex SIL2 IB16Tag E Det Valia Valid Data being rcvd Reset Tiedown Fault CRC error Config Data my1715adptr 2 C Input Data v duplicate seq num2 FPaconcilad low een nim z y Show ap 171 DT Doa Dares 210 Description Controller Program b For the 1715 adapters choose the status tag AB 1715 AENTR SIL2 S 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 6 Createa tag for the Reconciled Input Data by using the default data type and Read Write External Access The tag can be controller or program scoped ew Tas 6 hl Name IB16RecInpul Description JE Usage normal Type Base S Connection Alias For Data Typ
264. ons add or check data for these fields Table 42 Add or Check Data Fields Value SequenceNumber Description The instruction monitors a sequence number in the module defined Input Data tag In normal operation the sequence number increments by 1 with each incoming packet e Ifthe sequence number is a duplicate or is lower than expected data is discarded as invalid The CRTL is not reset e Ifthe sequence number is higher than expected but within a deadband of 100 the data packet is accepted Data remains valid and the CRTL is reset e Ifthe sequence number is more than 100 greater than the expected number the data is discarded as invalid The CRTL is not reset For each output packet the instruction increments the sequence number starting with 0 when the connection is initially established Important The sequence number is not configurable CRC The instruction calculates a CRC on the input data based on the module defined input tag and compares this value against the CRC in the input data If the CRCs do not match the data is discarded as invalid The instruction calculates a CRC on the output data based on the complete module defined output tag This CRC is added to the 1715 module defined output tag SIL2ResetNeeded output modules only After the CRTL expires the 1715 AENTR adapter adds this flag to the SIL 2 check data to indicate that it is providing the safe state values not valid application data
265. or channels to be declared faulted as a consequence of diagnostics that Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 259 Appendix A 260 Status Indicators are otherwise designed to ensure the channels are operating within their designed safety accuracy For details of slew rate limitations refer to the 1715 Redundant I O System Specifications Technical Data publication 1715 T D001 Channel Faults A channel fault is indicated when a detected faulty channel is isolated to a hardware fault on a specific channel of an I O module All channel faults are also reported as a module fault This means that the CHANNEL indicator turns RED the Module Status indicator turns RED and the Rack Status indicator on the adapter also turns RED A channel fault on an input module indicates that the channel with the fault no longer contributes to the reported values In a dual configuration as long as one channel is not faulted valid data continues to be reported Ifa channel fault on an output module occurs the channel continues to drive the output to the best of its ability in most cases Otherwise a fail safe state occurs In dual configuration the output values continue as determined by the adapter as the second module outputs the full current It is possible during sustained periods of abnormal field voltage and or current slewing for channels to be declared faulted as a consequence of diagnostics that are otherwise d
266. or current sync operation and by routing the channel outputs from two 8 channel analog output modules in parallel to 8 field devices Therefore each field device receives a current source from a channel on each of two modules So if one module fails or one or more channels fail on a module the outputs from the second module continues to supply the field devices 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Figure 21 1715 TASOF8 and 1715 TADOF8 Analog Output Termination Assemblies 1715 TASOF8 1715 TADOF8 Analog Output Simplex Analog Output Duplex Termination Assembly Termination Assembly DAOTA PCB130861 REV A 32123M Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 61 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 1715 C Expansion Cable A 2 m 6 56 ft expansion cable is available to connect I O modules to field devices and to allow for space restrictions within the enclosure of the system Ferrite SCSI 3 Cable Cable socket assembly Cable plug assembly 32086 M 1715 N2T and 1715 N2S Slot Filler Covers Slot filler covers are available in two sizes to cover empty slots in your system Use the tall cover catalog number 1715 N2T when no termination assembly is present Use the short cover catalog number 1715 N2S wh
267. or inputs if the SIL 2 data verification checks have determined that the connection is not valid and the Connection Reaction Time Limit CRTL has expired The default safe state value for digital inputs is OFF for analog input modules the safe state value is 0 Follow these steps to change the default values 1 Click the Input States When CRTL Expires tab 2 Use the pull down menus to choose values for each input point 3 Click OK i ode Properties nyI1Sadpt2 017151016021 TT General Connection SIL2 Safety Module Info A Module Info B Input States When CRTL Expires Configuration Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 227 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Check SIL 2 Reset Status View Module Information 228 If one of more errors have persisted longer than the Connection Reaction Time Limit CRTL the connection uses safe state values and requires a reset to recover When online the SIL 2 reset status is displayed on the SIL 2 Safety tab for output modules Click Reset to reset the connection and enable the output modules to control their outputs based on logic To reset the connection for input modules create a reset tag within the Add On Instruction See Chapter 7 for details The configuration signature that is displayed on the SIL 2 Safety tab is composed of an ID number date and time
268. or safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate This Type examination certificate relates only to the design of the specified equipment and not to specific items of equipment subsequently manufactured The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following C 9usc ExnAIC T4 Gc This is to certify that the sample s of the Equipment described herein Certified Equipment has been Em investigated and found in compliance with the Standard s indicated on this Certificate in accordance with the Certification Manager ATEX Equipment Certification Program Requirements This certificate and test results obtained apply only to the equipment sample s submitted by the Manufacturer UL did not select the sample s or determine whether Jan Erik Storgaard he sample s provided were representative of other manufactured equipment UL has not established Follow p Service or other surveillance of the equipment The Manufacturer is solely and fully responsible for conformity of all equipment to all applicable Standards specifications requirements or Directives The test results may not be used in whole or in part in any other document without UL s prior written appro Date of issue 2011 09 14 Re issued 2015 07 26 ation Body UL International Demko A S Borupvang 5A 2750 Ballerup Denmark Tel 45 44 85 65 65 info dk ul com www ul com 00 IC F0060 Issue 9 0 This certificate may only be reproduced i
269. ostics pfe M M 4 XISISI I v Full Diagnostics Configuration Selecting Full in the Diagnostics pull down menu loads a set of threshold default values into the threshold settings This must be selected if an EOL is used Figure 72 Full Diagnostics Threshold Default Values RemoteSen 2 C PtThreshald 0 f ZE i RemoteScn 2 C PtThreshold 0 OnlndeterminateRising FE RemoteScn 2 C PtT hreshold 0 ShortOnFalling emoteScn 2 C PtT hreshold 0 Short nRising ES Ghee im serena Gr S LI ar een e HE RemoteScn 2 C PtT hreshold 0 OnlndeterminateF alling Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 277 AppendixB 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics For a full diagnostics setting configuration use these resistor values IMPORTANT These are the most common commercially available EOL devices Table 58 Full Diagnostics Resistor Values Item Value R1 15 kQ 196 power 0 5 W max power dissipated 0 128 W R2 3 9 kO 1 power 0 5 W max power dissipated 0 128 W Loop supply voltage 24V DC 1090 None Diagnostics Configuration Selecting None in the Diagnostics pull down menu loads another set of default values into the threshold settings This is selected when no EOL devices are used Figure 73 None Diagnostics Threshold Default Values Below 5 5V Causes An Off Condition RemoteSen
270. p Rate Alarm is latched and the unit is explicitly reset Ramp alarm unlatch Clamp limits Clamp limit alarms When a Ramp Rate Alarm is latched a bit in the output image can be used to unlatch the alarm The unlatch is triggered on a rising edge If the change in the channel value is still limited by the Maximum Ramp Rate when the latch is attempted the alarm remains A direct to module message can also be used to unlatch an alarm Changing limits the output from the analog module to remain within a range that the controller configures even when the controller commands an output outside that range When a command value exceeds a clamp limit either above the High clamp or below the Low clamp the output is commanded to the clamp value and an alarm is indicated in the input tag Clamp alarm latch When latching is enabled Clamp Limit Alarms are latched until they are reset This aids in detecting intermittent issues Clamp alarm unlatch When a clamp alarm is latched a bit in the output image can be used to unlatch the alarm The unlatch is triggered on a rising edge If the point is still camped when the unlatch is attempted the clamp and alarm remains A direct to module message can also be used to unlatch an alarm Not a number TIP A bit in the input tag indicates when the controller has commanded an output value that is not a number For more information on 1715 IB16D module diagnostics and information
271. pecify the Connection Reaction Time Limit and Requested Packet Iiteryalbi venie Loos kit eed ati ere ua et o DC adea 224 Set Safe State Values for Inputs oit 1525 eod ete eed 227 Check SIL 2 Reset Status soto es once or ea tr a tee 228 View Module Infotin4tiolis 1224s Et reet ekle eia 228 Ioyagposticlata a dose eee tA nie e eme raus 228 Reaction Times oves vett Dossier estos Eat eae eas 229 System Reaction Wim erue Er IER Mie EV 229 Logix System Reaction Time 22 o2 45 044 eR DE EAE RES S 230 Configuring the SIL 2 Task Period and Watchdog 230 SIL Task Program Instructionses seed eectu emet retis eres 230 Configuring the Output Module Program Fault Actions 231 Additional ResoutCescuucs queste ix tad ele bec ie tor eee dated a d ees 232 Chapter 7 SIL 2 Add On Instructions Overview eee eee 233 SIE Z Check D alitssc se epe eter eR aa uus 237 Add On InsteuetionInDute iecit bel p emus neg eren 238 Add On Instruction Outputs 24 0 c0 4 dul o ee th ye 238 Download and Import the Add On Instructions 239 Import Add On Instructions to Upgraded Projects 240 Create a Periodic Task for SIL 2 Safety Functions 240 1715 SIL 2 Periodic Task Period Configuration 241 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 9 Table of Contents Redundant 1 0 System Diagnostics Status Indicators 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnost
272. plex mode to the project 1 Add the new module see page 186 2 Select the 1715 OB8DE Digital Output module see page 186 and click OK The General tab appears Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Fault Program Action 1715 OB8DE 8 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Output Electronically Fused Allen Bradley AENTR Digital Output Module Duplex Module A Slot ModuleB Slot 7 3 Enter the module name Notice that there are still two slot numbers that are displayed indicating that the module is in the default Duplex mode 4 Click Change see Steps 6 7 and 8 on page 193 198 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 A new General tab appears in Simplex mode General Connection Module Info Configuration Fault Program Action Type 1715 OB8DE 8 Point 24V DC Diagnostic Output Electronically Fused Vendor Allen Bradley Parent AENTR Name Digital Output Module Duplex Slot Description Module Definition Revision 21 Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Redundant No SIL2 Safety No Notice there is now only one slot number available and Redundant is No indicating that the module is now in Simplex mode Click the Connection tab see page 177 Click the Module Info tab see page 178 Click the Configuration tab see page 196 Click the Fault Program Act
273. put Module Diagnostics If 5 1V is present we know that the switch is in the off position We can enter a range into the threshold that lets 5 1V to be an off condition We used 3 0 6 5V as the range So if the voltage drops below 3 0V it is considered a wire off If it goes above 6 5V it is considered indeterminate Edit Custom Thresholds Faling Thresholds 65 v 60 5 1V Falls Within The 35 v Range Cancel Help 282 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Appendix B Closed Switch On Condition If SW1 is closed then current only flows through R2 so to calculate the voltage present at the input module use the R2 value of 3 9 kQ Rtotal Figure 76 Closed Switch On Condition Solution For Voltage 24V DC 15 kQ T ti ermination e Y l Assembly l swi G a e B 1 5 1kQ Fog tj LA Vy E Shield if used Termina Blocks 45678 3 9 K E 24 OK E 10 4 Vin 24 10 4 Solution For Voltage ae Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 283 AppendixB 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics If 13 6V is present the switch is in the on position A range can be entered into the threshold value that lets 13 6V be an on condition We u
274. put module 5 32E 06 3 00E 04 1 06E 05 6 88E 06 1 Calculated MTBF and PFD by FMEA to 61508 2000 2 For the latest approved versions see the Revision Release List available from the Product Certifications link at http www ab com De energize to trip 2 year Proof Test Interval Table 63 De energize to trip 2 year Proof Test Interval MTTR 10 Hours PTI 2 0 Years Simplex Configuration Duplex Configuration z v e Sec e v o 9 co e 2 25 s v LE ec v w LE s ec w ES z 5 a S B zz e x IH v mig a a x v a 1715 Ethernet AENTR adapter S S 2 5 2 dual lt lg E 2 3 g 3 8 module ni D ed S b 1715 16 IB16D channel digital 5 f eis 3 input mE qe qe um t E Te De module e esie fet jee ee fe m la 1715 16 IF16 channel analog 2 2 83 BOTE wd rd a mE e S m R IR s JS module e Hee a View Jan e E foes 59 Les 1715 8 OB8DE channel digital 5 2 s 2 output wa e Se m w d module Se i818 I J Ja I amp 18 fe 1715 8 OF8l channel analog 5 2 9 Ex output d ss d d i d module 15 qm SES e 2 ie gs Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 297 PFD and PFH Calculations for a SIL 2 System Appendix D Energize to action 2 year Proof Test Interval Table 64 Energize to action 2 year Proof Test Interval
275. r a valid gateway address Domain Name Displays the domain name of the module or to configure the IP settings manually enter a valid domain name Host Name Displays the host name of the module or enter a valid host name Primary DNS Server Address Displays the primary DNS server IP address of the module or if you chose to configure the IP settings manually enter a valid primary DNS server address Secondary DNS Server Address Displays the secondary DNS server IP address of the module or if you chose to configure the IP settings manually enter a valid secondary DNS server address Refresh communication This link appears when communication with the module has failed Click Refresh communication to attempt to restart communication with the module Set Click this button to commit your modifications to the module Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 181 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System 10 Click the Port Configuration tab The Port Configuration tab appears x General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Intemet Protoc Port Enable Link Status P 49 EBERT Dope Negotiate Diagnostics ipa ye Iu z z Ez Eig ie fa zi zi z EEN E Ei E E z L 5 I in zi r z Refresh communication Se e Status Creating Cancel Help Table 27 Port Configuration Parameters Parameters Description Port Displays the name of the port Enable
276. r example 1734 1738 and 1794 modules and the current revision ofthe parent does not support Unicast Unicast is not supported with ControlLogix Redundancy version 19 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 145 Chapter 3 146 Digital 1 0 Operation Enable Change of State The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you determine whether a change of state occurs when a field device becomes Off to On or On to Off 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Mi New Module E xj General Connection Module Info A Module Info B Configuration Enable Change of State ga Off On Diagnostics On Off Custom Thresholds Open Wire Latch Detection Diagnostics K Fu v A v v ju E v zd 2 Vo ru gt v 2 v v ju ej K d 2 vou v 2 Iv Vv Full xl Vv Vv iv w rw i M M d v rw rz v v d v ru zl v K IV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions i Full and custom diagnostics require use of an appropriate end of line device Status Creating Cancel Help 2 Doone ofthe following e Check a checkbox to enable COS for a specific point for either Off to On or On to Off e Clear the checkbox to disable the COS for a specific point 3 Click OK See Threshold Values for Digital Inputs on page 261 for setting custom threshold configurations Field side
277. rates a sequence number and CRC to Generate CRC generate the output 1715 0F8 Configuration Tag data packet 715 OF8 4 5 1715 AENTR W e 11715 AENTR f Module Configuration Module Configuration Check Data gt _ gt Check Data Important The 1715 OF8 module is shown but the example also applies to the 1715 OB8DE module 236 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 SIL 2 Check Data Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 The instructions gather data from the module defined configuration tags for the following check data values Table 41 Check Data Values Value VariantlD Description This is the revision of the module which is always 2 SourcelP For input assemblies this is the IP address of the 1715 adapter For output assemblies this is the IP address of the ControlLogix Ethernet module DestinationlP For input assemblies this is the IP address of the ControlLogix Ethernet module For output assemblies this is the IP address of the 1715 adapter SourceSlot For input assemblies this is the slot number of the 1715 module For output assemblies this is the slot number of the ControlLogix controller DestinationSlot For input assemblies this is the slot number of the ControlLogix controller For output assemblies this is the slot number of the 1715 module The instructi
278. resses back again Module B remains as the primary module Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 27 Chapter 1 28 Redundancy System Overview Obtaining a New IP Address The IP address of the primary module is stored in the adapter base unit through interaction with the TCP IP object If a stored primary IP address is available the adapter uses that address If a stored primary IP address is not available then the adapter uses BOOTP DHCP to obtain an IP address The adapter transmits DHCP requests but is able to process a BOOTP DHCP response from either a DHCP or BOOTP server If the BOOTP DHCP request is unsuccessful the secondary adapter that is Module B attempts to obtain the IP address of the primary module through BOOTP DHCP The adapters continue to attempt BOOTP DHCP configuration until an IP address is obtained alternating between adapters A and B Once an adapter has obtained the IP address the secondary module can use that IP address 1 Once an adapter has a primary IP address it confirms that it does not have a duplicate IP address See EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems publication ENET UM001 The Network Status indicator displays duplicated IP addresses by showing solid RED For additional information about assigning an IP address for the first time see Chapter 2 Assign an IP Address on page 125 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015
279. retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if non metallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications In addition to this publication see the following e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional installation requirements e NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures Prevent Electrostatic Discharge ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment e Toucha grounded object to discharge potential static e Wear an approved grounding wriststrap e Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e Use a static safe workstation if available Store the equipment in appropriate static safe packaging when not in use ATTENTION Do not insert or remove a module base unit or termination assembly while power is applied Interruption of the backplane can result in unintentional operation or machine motion ATTENTIO
280. roject in the 1 0 configuration tree and configure them properly 2 SIL 2 Yes must be selected when configuring the module This creates the data types and tags that you must use in the Add On Instruction Follow these steps to add the instructions to your project 1 Right click the Add On Instructions folder and choose Import Add On Instruction 2 Select the appropriate Add On Instruction and click Import 3 Click OK on the Import Configuration dialog box 4 Repeat steps 1 3 for each Add On Instruction you require The Add On Instructions folder now contains the instructions that you imported The instructions also appear in the Add On tab of the instruction toolbar The CRC calculator Add On Instruction also appears Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 239 Chapter7 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules IMPORTANT You see the following warning for each Add On Instruction import except the first one Each Add On Instruction import overwrites the Add On Instruction that is called CRC Calculator and this warning appears because it is source protected Click OK RSLogix 5000 A Calls to the following instruction s exist in source that is not editable CRC calculator These calls have not been modified to maintain arguments Check all locations calling instruction s to ensure that they will execute correctly Manual updates may be required The appropri
281. rolLogix controller the 1715 module that produces the input tag generates more check data as part of the tag It is the responsibility of the ControlLogix application to use appropriate Add On Instructions to validate the received data The behavior of the Add On Instructions in processing input data is as follows a CLX Np Init NOTE Whenever Data Valid FALSE the AOI must Reconciled Input be Reset as errors have been found in the SIL2 Configured Defaults transmission from 1715 module to CLX input tag Data Valid FALSE CRTL Timer started Initialisation Complete eh Application Valid SIL2 Data Received i m Valid SIL2 Data Update NOT Received Within CRTL S3 Valid SIL2 Data Update Received Application Running Within CRTL Reconciled Input Received Input Data a i DataValid TRUE Valid SiL2 3L2 Data Update NOT Received E gt Ta Input y Configured Defaults WS FALSE SIL2 Valid SIL2 Data Update Received pe Within CRTL f Reset E Timer Waiting For Valid Valid SIL2 Data Update NOT Received Within CRTL 254 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Chapter 8 Redundant 1 0 System Diagnostics Topic Page Diagnostic Features Diagnostic Features 255 Many of the diagnostic functions that are associated with an analog module are provided by proxy by the adapter These tables summarize the functions for each module type Tabl
282. rovides termination for 16 digital input channels and mates with up to two 1715 IB16D digital input modules 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Figure 18 1715 TASIB16D and 1715 TADIB16D Digital Input Termination Assemblies 1715 TASIB16D 1715 TADIB16D Digital Input Simplex Digital Input Duplex Termination Assembly Termination Assembly Terminal Block Cable Entry This Side bl pna dn ii Y CHO CH1 CH2CH3 CH4CH5 CH6CH CH8CH9 mmm mc UR ssissississ SSiSSiSSiSs O OV OV CHO CHI CH2 CH3 Channel CH4 CHS cHe CH7 CH8 CH9 Fuse Fuse Holder CH10CHI1 CH12 cH13 CH14 CH15 Fuse Cover i TM O TE T n FH1 r 8 JBgg eee E t R IS 5 FE 5 fa 9 s RESTE TOS COEOSSM E o a E 3 I E E al E Fuse 8 SN s i Covers O 1 Polarization Pins 32120 M Fuse Type Littelfuse No 396 TE5 50 mA Timelag Fuse UL 248 14 125V T Leadfree for Digital Input Termination Assemblies Remove and replace fuses with a pair of long nosed pliers The simplex termination assembly routes the input signals to one input module In duplex arrangements the input signals are routed to two parallel modules See page 96 for detailed wiring instructions Rockwell Automation P
283. rray of 8 structures for the output data 0 Data 1 Faults Data REAL Commanded output value Control DINT bit field Alarm control Bit Name Description 0 HAlarmUnlatch Rising edge transition that is 0 gt 1 unlatches alarm 1 LAlarmUnlatch Rising edge transition that is 0 gt 1 unlatches alarm 2 RateAlarmUnlatch Rising edge transition that is 0 gt 1 unlatches alarm Table 83 8 channel Analog Output Simplex Input Tag Name Data Type Definition Fault DINT Binary Module fault bit 0 when a module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no module is present no Logix connection exits or reported data is invalid ChDuplex 0 7 Array of structure Array of 8 structures that represent the data and fault status for channels 0 7 0 Data 1 Faults ReadBack REAL Input data Faults DINT bit field Channel fault status Bit Name Description 0 Fault 0 Good 1 Circuit fault for this channel 4 InHold 5 NotANumber 6 LAlarm 7 HAlarm 8 RateAlarm Status DINT bit field Bit Name Description 8 GroupFault 0 Good 1 Any channel on module is faulted failed 316 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Table 84 8 channel Analog Output Simplex Input l OTag Definitions Appendix F Tag Name Data Type Definition Fault DINT Binary Module fault bit 0 when a module is present and reporting valid data OxFFF_FFFF when no module is present no Logix connection exits or reported data
284. rror Description If the sequence number is higher than expected data is discarded as invalid and this output is set HI to indicate the reason If any of these check data values described on page 237 do not match the values in the 1715 module configuration data is declared invalid and discarded The appropriate output is set HI to indicate the reason Module Connection Status Add On Instruction Running This output is set LO if the Add On Instruction detects a connection loss Input data is declared invalid and the CRTL is not reset When the connection is re established this output is set HI Ifthe 1715 module is at the correct firmware revision level Variant ID 2 and the logic in the Add On Instruction is being scanned this output toggles at the rate of the RPI SIL 2 Output Reset Needed Only for output modules This output is set HI if a SIL 2 Reset is necessary reset the outputs from the safe state and begin controlling outputs programmatically See Performing a SIL 2 Reset on page 253 CRTL Countdown A countdown of the amount of time remaining before the CRTL expires Number of Discarded Data Packets A count of the data packets that have been discarded as invalid The SIL 2 Add On Instructions are available from the Product Compatibility and Download Center website IMPORTANT Before you import the Add On Instructions to your project you must do the following 1 Add your I 0 modules to the p
285. rting valid channel data the lowest value is used If one module of a pair reports a fault on a channel the value of the operational module is used monitored by the application program and used to provide an alarm to ATTENTION In safety critical applications the discrepancy alarms must be operations personnel Digital Output Modules The digital output module is rated at SIL 2 as a fail safe module Each module provides the following safety functions e Output channel signals are based on commands from the controller e Redundant voltage and current measurements are sent to the controller for monitoring and diagnostics e Modules feature over current and over voltage channel protection e Diagnostic tests are executed on command from the adapter and results are reported back to the adapter e On powerup or module insertion all output channels are set to the de energized fail safe state until command states are received from the controller Each channel is driven individually according to the command state values e The module enters a Shutdown mode when the time between controller communication exceeds the CRTL e Ifa module fails then all of its channels are set to the de energized state The digital output termination assembly is safety critical and comes in two sizes simplex or duplex Termination assemblies have fuses for field output power and eight field termination connections for the output signals Output module
286. s Channel3 PMA Commands PWR lt mm n PMB Commands on PM Commands Channel4 4 CMD Input Data Data Management pe i Channel 5 4 nput Data FPGA 1 O Backplane Module Status Front Panel o LEDS Channel6 Channel Status gt O Dual Input T1 Channel7 94 Measurement 4 Isolator PWR path Device gt au Dual SYS_24V1 Redundant SYS 24V2 oes gt Over Under 9 PWR System ower Voltage Power OV Supply l gt Protection Power Valid 32106 M Function Block Diagram Fach input signal is routed through the termination assembly to two input measurement devices These devices determine the input status and channel condition and generate the input data for the controller Signal and power isolation circuits separate each input channel from the rest of the system thus protecting the system components from field faults The internal isolated power supply from the 24V DC dual redundant system power inputs produces module power The isolated power supply provides power to the module and is protected by over voltage and undervoltage detection circuits Supply voltage monitoring initiates a warning signal and Power off Protection mode when a power failure is detected Internal diagnostics which the adapter controls test the module at routine intervals of 50 100 ms An independent watchdog arrangement also monitors the module operation and provides more fault containment by activating a
287. s the 1715 IF16 AOI processes the most recent packet every 50 ms This provides a compromise between controller bandwidth not processing the packets too often using old data and overall 1715 screw to screw performance Because the 1715 AOI run on a time basis the input module AOI and the output module AOI can be asynchronous See page 241 for more 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 information The periodic task rate affects the actual process rate and periodic task scan time The worst case safety reaction time can be calculated using the formulas that are shown in the following example For the following example assume the following e 1715 Input Module RPI 60 ms e 1715 Output Module RPI 80 ms e SIL2 Task Period 30 ms e SIL 2 Task Watchdog 20 ms AOI Module RPI 60 ms Table 47 Worst Case Reaction Time Calculations Worst Case Factors Value Fixed User Description Time ms Configurable Time ms 1715 Input Module Delay 15 1715 Backplane Rate 65 1715 AENTR Delay 25 Input Data to ControlLogix COS NO 1715 Input Module RPI 60 COS Change of State COS YES Fixed 60 Add On Instruction Module RPI AOI Module RPI 2 30 Value that is entered into the AOI Module_RPI parameter ControlLogix SIL2 Task Period SIL 2 Task Period 30 Input data asynchronous to scan ControlLogix SIL2 Task
288. s and degrade to 1001 1 out of 1 upon detection of the first fault in either module The modules fail safe if faults occur on both modules The adapters operate in 1002 under no fault conditions and degrade to lool upon detection of the first fault A duplex system could therefore be 1002 reverting to lool on the first detected fault and reverting to fail safe when both modules have a fault Fail safe is defined as the de energized or off state The Ethernet architecture has no affect on SIL 2 safety functions You can use either of these example drawings or any other appropriate Ethernet network From a safety aspect if the Ethernet packets are not sent successfully then the SIL 2 safety functions go to their respective safe states 214 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Sensor Sensor 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 Figure 60 Duplex DLR with a ControlLogix Controller SIL 2 ControlLogix Safety Loop To TB Actuator E E 2 2 1715 1715 1715
289. s and termination assemblies for the 1715 Redundant I O System are as follows Table 16 Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules and Components Cat No Description 1715 IB16D 16 channel digital input module 1715 0B8DE 8 channel digital output module 1715 TASIB16D 16 channel digital input simplex termination assembly 1715 TADIB16D 16 channel digital input duplex termination assembly 1715 TASOB8DE 8 channel digital output simplex termination assembly 1715 TADOB8DE 8 channel digital output duplex termination assembly 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module The digital input interface is a combination of digital input modules and termination assemblies The 24V DC isolated digital input modules have a flexible and fail safe design The 1715 IB16D interfaces 16 digital input channels and can be configured in RSLogix programming software as simplex or duplex by selecting one of the two available termination assemblies and the required number of modules IMPORTANT When the 1715 IB16D digital input module is used with the 1715 TASIB16D simplex termination assembly it is nonisolated The 1715 IB16D digital input module features are as follows e Flexible modular construction for user configured I O applications e 16 channel connection capability e Suitable for simplex duplex connections and fault tolerant applications e Independent galvanically isolated input channels e Built in diagnostic testing and independent watchdog facility
290. s support high availability when configured for duplex operation and using the appropriate termination assembly Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 Reaction to Faults If an output module faults the following status information is reported e Module presence e Module health and status e Channel health and status e Field faults e An echo of the front panel indicators for each module If any of the following internal conditions exist the output module fails safe e Internal software error is detected e Over temperature condition is detected e Power supply rails are out of tolerance The digital output module incorporates line test functionality that can detect and indicate no load field faults This functionality can be enabled or disabled keale Configuration Fautt Program Action ign No Load ur iz Euch Diagnostics Status Offine ok Cancel Apply Help Shutdown Modes When the module is in Shutdown mode the Ready and Run indicators turn red During module configuration you choose how you want the output channels to behave in the Shutdown mode whether due to fault or Program mode Output module channels can be configured to provide the following channel values e De energized OFF which is the default fail safe
291. s the input data to be used in the logic program Input Data This is the raw data from the 1715 module You must point to this tag when configuring the Add On Instruction Module RPI Reset Add On Instruction Outputs Enter this value manually from the module properties Use the exact value to optimize system bandwidth The reset function requires a LO to HI transition of this tag It resets faults and directs the ControlLogix controller to stop transferring the safe state data and start transferring the actual data if the SIL 2 check data is verified This tag is also sent to the 1715 output modules so that outputs can be reset from the safe state The Add On Instructions generate these outputs Table 44 Add On Instruction Outputs Output Data Valid Description This value is HI if the Add On Instruction is moving the input data to the Reconciled Input Data tag without substituting safe state values This value remains HI if packets are being discarded but the CRTL has not timed out During this time the reconciled input data is not updated and data is no longer current If the CRTL expires the safe state values are placed into the Reconciled Input Data tag Valid Data Being Received If valid data is being received from the module this output is HI regardless of whether this data is being moved to the Reconciled Input Data tag This output must be HI before you perform a SIL 2 Reset to begin moving actual da
292. scription 0 Auto negotiation in progress 1 Auto negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed by using a default value for speed and duplex 2 Auto negotiation of duplex but detected speed by using a default value for duplex 3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed 4 Auto negotiation not attempted by using forced speed and duplex values 5 255 Undefined PortB2ANStatus SINT enumerated Enumerated adapter Ethernet port auto negotiation status Value Description 0 Auto negotiation in progress 1 Auto negotiation of duplex and speed detection failed by using a default value for speed and duplex 2 Auto negotiation of duplex but detected speed by using a default value for duplex 3 Successfully negotiated duplex and speed 4 Auto negotiation not attempted by using forced speed and duplex values 5 255 Undefined PortA1Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use for example 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps or 0 when port is active PortA2Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use for example 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps or 0 when port is active PortB1Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use for example 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps or 0 when port is active PortB2Speed DINT Interface speed in Mbps that is in use for example 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps or 0 when port is active ClPTimeouts DINT Total of all Connection Manager object Connection Timeout values ClPConnections DINT Total number of active CIP connections 310 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 U
293. sed 19 10 5V as the range So if the voltage drops below 10 5V it is indeterminate and if it goes above 19V it is a short circuit Edit Custom Thresholds Rising Faling Thresholds Thresholds 19 v 185 M 13 6V Falls Within The Range 11 y 105 v y D iy HAT 284 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Appendix B Calculate On Off Condition for Resistor Values If a threshold value is set and we wanted to figure out which resistors to use we can follow these examples On Condition Foran on condition use the following formulas In this case the module load is 5 1 kQ and the supply voltage is assumed to be 24V DC So for this example use Figure 77 and choose 13V DC because it is a value within the range in the threshold tables Figure 77 On Condition 24V DC m p l 6 p N p sw1 ai bd 51kQ Module E Resistance R2 oy Vea Eg Shield if used e Terminal Blocks 45678 OV Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 285 286 AppendixB 1715 IB16D Digital Input Module Diagnostics Et R2 VIN Module Resistance MR 45682 MR ET R2 MR VIN E 5100 24 _ 5100 R2 m 15 45683 R2 4 3K 4 3 kQ is a close standard value so we use 3 9
294. semblies the Logix Designer application and the required number of modules Termination assemblies provide termination for the field I O channels and by the use of coding pegs and sockets are matched to a specific analog I O module Module keying can also be set in the RSLogix 5000 or Logix Designer project Field connections are made at the terminal block connectors on the termination assembly Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 155 Chapter4 Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features The analog I O modules and termination assemblies for the 1715 Redundant I O System are as follows Table 18 Types of ControlLogix Analog 1 0 Modules and Components Cat No Description 1715 IF16 16 channel analog input module 1715 0F8l 8 channel analog output module 1715 TASIF16 16 channel analog input simplex termination assembly 1715 TADIF16 16 channel analog input duplex termination assembly 1715 TASOF8I 8 channel analog output simplex termination assembly 1715 TADOFS8I 8 channel analog output duplex termination assembly 1715 IF16 Analog Input Module The analog input interface is a combination of input modules and analog input termination assemblies The 16 channel analog input module has a flexible and fail safe design The 1715 IF16 analog input module features are as follows e Flexible modular construction for user configured I O applications e 16 channel connection capability e Suitable for s
295. sembly Cable socket assembly Item Description 1 Cable socket assembly 2 SCS1 3 cable 3 Ferrite 4 Cable plug assembly Expansion cables are available in 2 m 78 74 in lengths TIP Terminators are not required at the end of the bus last base unit Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 81 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Install Expansion Cable To install an expansion cable follow these steps Extending from left hand side Extending from right hand side Item Description 1 M3 Socket Cap Screw 2 Cable Plug Assembly 3 Cable Socket Assembly 4 M3 Nut 32081M Table 9 Expansion Cable Components Item Description 1 M3 socket cap screw 2 Cable plug assembly 3 Cable socket assembly 4 M3 nut IMPORTANT Adapter base units can only be extended from the right side 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Connect to a 1715 A310 3 slot I O Base Unit 1 To extend from the right hand side of an I O base unit insert a cable plug assembly into the I O backplane connector Extending from right hand side 32081 M 2 When installing the cable on the left side of the base unit insert a cable socket assembly into the I O backplane connector Extending from left hand side 32081 M Rockwell Automation Pu
296. sumes the fail safe state IMPORTANT The default fail safe state for all 1715 modules is de energized Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 225 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications e Itis recommended that the CRTL remain at the default of four times the RPI so that one invalid packet does not put the system into the safe state For example if the RPI 120 ms then consider 480 ms as the minimum CRIL The information in the next section helps determine the maximum setting for the CRTL Determining the Appropriate CRTL Value Use the following method to confirm whether the default value is acceptable or you must change the CRTL value for your application This equation governs the value of CRTL for the I O connections CRT Leuc CRTL s sensor delay actuator delay 2 where CRTLeuc is the process safety time for the equipment under control euc EXAMPLE Consider a system function using one sensor and one actuator given the following parameters e CRILeuc 10 000 ms Sensor delay 250 ms e Time for actuator an ESD valve to fully operate 1750 ms In this example the setting of CRTL for the 1 0 connections is less than or equal to 3000 ms 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Chapter 6 Set Safe State Values for Inputs You must define the safe state values f
297. t 184 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 The Module Properties dialog box appears lll Module Properties CLX Ethernet module en2tr 0 1715 AENTR 1 1 Hefresh Heset Module 2 Click the Module Info A or Module Info B tabs Adapter status information displays Check Adapter Status via the Owner Controller Tags To check the status of the primary and secondary adapters through the owner controller tags follow these steps 1 Goonline with the controller 2 Double click the Controller Tags folder in the Controller Organizer Sj Controller Redundant IO System Controller Tags Controller Fault Pandler Power Up Handler 1 3 Tasks Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 185 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System The Controller Tags window appears _ _ sis em em ABATIE_AENTRSO Adapter Madule S Fault 2 0000_000 Binary DINT MEARUM o Decimal BOOL Adapter Module S ModBF aul U Decimal BOOL _ Adapter_Module S Powerl Fault 0 Decimal BOOL Adapter Module S Power2Faut 0 Decimal BOOL a 4dapter_Module S Port41 Connected 0 Decimal BOOL 4 Adapter Module S Port42Connected 0 Decimal BOOL Adapter Module S PortB1Connected 0 Decimal BOOL E Adapter Module S PortB2Connected Decimal BOOL 4dapter_Module S
298. t Assign only one primary IP address to the MAC address TIP You only assign one IP address to this hardware The firmware automatically assigns the secondary IP address which is the primary IP address 1 The secondary module is not visible in the RSLinx Classic RSWho tool It responds to an Ethernet ping of its IP address Any BOOTP DHCP server can be used to assign IP addresses Step 1 Assign an IP Address on the BOOTP DHCP Server To assign an address follow this procedure to launch the BOOTP DHCP server 1 From the Start button choose Programs Rockwell Software BOOTP DHCP Server gt BOOTP DHCP Server 5 Fullshot 9 l 3 fi Software gt Gap BOOTP DHCP Server gt FD BOOTP DHCP Help Fam Programs EI BOOTP DHCP Server Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 125 Chapter2 Installation Instructions 2 Verify BOOTP network settings Choose Tools Network Settings These settings are transmitted to the module along with your IP address so verify that they are the correct settings IMPORTANT Top MAC Address The adapter must be physically connected to the network running the BOOTP server Multiple MAC address requests are received The lowest MAC addresses correspond to the leftmost adapter slot or primary adapter Do not assign an IP address to the higher MAC address requests as these addresses correspond to the rightmost adapter slot or secondary module
299. t 0 base unit 1715 TASIB16D Termination assembly digital input simplex 1715 TADIB16D Termination assembly digital input duplex 1715 TASOB8DE Termination assembly digital output simplex 1715 TADOB8DE Termination assembly digital output duplex 1715 TASIF16 Termination assembly analog input simplex 1715 TADIF16 Termination assembly analog input duplex 1715 TASOF8 Termination assembly analog output simplex 1715 TADOF8 Termination assembly analog output duplex 1715 N2T Tall slot filler cover 1715 N25 Short slot filler cover 1715 02 Expansion cable 2 m 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Required Tools The installation and maintenance of the 1715 Redundant I O System requires these tools Screwdriver 0 8 x 9 0 mm 1 25 x 3 8 in for module clamp screws and slot filler covers Torque screwdriver 0 6 x 3 0 mm 1 40 x 1 8 in for DC power wiring terminals Torque screwdriver 0 4 x 2 0 mm 1 64 x 5 64 in for field wiring terminals Two open end wrenches 10 mm 0 39 in for ground stud nuts A 2 5 mm 0 10 in Allen wrench Spacing Requirements You must consider spacing requirements before mounting your system IMPORTANT Make sure that you meet the minimum spacing requirements shown Allow 15 3 20 cm 6 0 8 0 in between chassis and a heat source and chassis and cabinet and allow 5 1 cm 2 0 in between wireway and top or
300. t version 21 or later RSLinx Classic software version 2 57 Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or higher Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 32 and 64 bit and Microsoft Windows 2003 Server ControlFLASH software revision 2 001 Adapter Add on Profile at Product Compatibility and Download Center website I O Modules Add on Profile Product Compatibility and Download Center website IMPORTANT The adapter ships with factory boot firmware and must be updated before use The 1 0 modules are flashed with the correct firmware IMPORTANT You must make sure that there are no active connections to the 1715 chassis before performing a firmware update After upgrading a revision 1 005 1715 chassis to revision 2 001 or later power to the 1715 chassis must be cycled 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Module Placement A general overview of a typical redundant I O system layout is shown here I 34 c c c c oo c c c O mo OQ m Ir O SS SS S o jJeSSSISSSI o lssssssjs n fa oee GEE EEE OOOO NANN NAN
301. t the adapter base unit ground stud to the AC safety ground bus bar of the system e Use an M6 lug on the end of the ground wire e Place the lug below the second nut on the ground stud between two washers and use two 10 mm 039 in wrenches to tighten the nuts e Use a minimum conductor wire size of 4 mm 10 AWG Figure 29 Adapter Base Unit Ground Connection Detail AC Ground Connection Only MP PWR 24V1 OV MP PWR 24V2 32125M 88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Connect Field Wiring Connect the field wiring to the screw terminal blocks on the termination assemblies IMPORTANT The termination assemblies have integral fuses IMPORTANT You must use safety wiring principles if the applicable standards for the system require you take precautions to avoid external short circuits because the internal diagnostics in the 1715 adapter do not detect external short circuits between channels These standards include NFPA 72 ATTENTION To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD all connections to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with safety extra AN low voltage SELV or protected extra low voltage PELV ATTENTION To comply with UL restrictions all connections to this equipment must be powered from a UL Listed source compliant with Limited Voltage Current per UL 508 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P
302. ta to the Reconciled Input Data tag This output goes LO if a valid data packet is not received for a time equaling three 3 Module RPls If this output is toggling LO verify that the RPI entered into the Add On Instruction matches the actual module RPI The periodic task rate can also affect this output If the periodic task rate is too high then the packets are not processed often enough See the 1715 SIL 2 task recommendations in this manual for configuration recommendations Reset Tiedown Fault If the reset button is HI for longer than 3 seconds a tiedown fault is declared The fault is cleared when the reset button transitions to LO CRC Error CRC Error is HI if the accumulated error count for detected CRC errors has exceeded the allowable threshold Duplicate Sequence Number If the sequence number is a duplicate data is discarded as invalid and this output is set HI to indicate the reason Low Sequence Number If the sequence number is lower than expected data is discarded as invalid and this output is set HI to indicate the reason 238 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Download and Import the Add On Instructions Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 Table 44 Add On Instruction Outputs Output High Sequence Number Source IP Error Source Slot Error Destination IP Error Destination Slot Error Variant ID E
303. tal Output 1715 TASIB16D Digital Input Termination Assembly 1715 TADIB16D Digital Input Termination Assembly 1715 TASIF16 Analog Input Termination Assembly 1715 TADIF16 Analog Input Termination Assembly 1715 TASOB8DE Digital Output Termination Assembly 1715 TADOBS8DE Digital Output Termination Assembly 1715 TASOF8 Analog Output Termination Assembly 1715 TADOF8 Analog Output Termination Assembly Manufacturer Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Address 1201 S 2 St Milwaukee WI 53204 USA This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto are specified in the schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to UL International Demko A S certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements that relate to the design of Category 3 equipment which is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres These Essential Health and Safety Requirements are given in Annex II to the European Union Directive 94 9 EC of 23 March 1994 The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no 4786831849 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements with the exception of those listed in the schedule of this certificate has been assessed by reference to Standards EN 60079 0 2012 A11 2013 EN 60079 15 2010 If the sign X is placed after the certificate number it indicates that the equipment or protective system is subject to special conditions f
304. tal output module are shown in this table Table 55 Digital Output Module Status Indicators Indicator State Description Healthy Steady off No power Steady green Module operational The module has been configured and is operating without any faults Flashing green Standby The module has not been configured Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on this module Ready Steady off No power or no partner module present Steady green Synchronized Synchronized with partner module redundant operation Run Steady off No power no backplane communication No power or the module is not communicating over the backplane Steady green Connected The module has at least one established connection Flashing green No connections The module is communicating over the backplane but there are no established connections Channel 0 7 Steady off Off de energized The channel is off de energized Steady amber On energized The channel is on energized Flashing amber Field fault A field fault has been detected on this channel Steady red Fault A fault has been detected on this channel Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 269 AppendixA Status Indicators 1715 Analog Input Module 270 The digital output module has these status indicators Conci ANALOG INPUT 17154F16 Allen Bradley Healthy Ready Channe Channe Channe Channe Channe Channe Ch
305. tandard Digital I O Modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP Module Fault Reporting s ease uq nates bte ee tret over ite Fully Software Configurable eer en Module Inhibiting 5 soci ciasics oo mr ebbe ear niea Status Indicator Information 22 2 4 sock Le tL ea Features Specific to 1715 IB16D Digital Input Modules Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State See RPD 52 asas vetere Fevasn be e pei Me sedes Enable Change Of State dos eoe ir uie aid aet eed eie e Field side Diagnostics usus ens Sepa genes aue RI RUE US A Features Specific to 1715 OBD8E Digital Output Modules Configurable Point level Output Fault States Output Data Echo cn E eC BUSING assay cas Ra Vee a leas OW VERST ET IU Va NECI reale d EE Diagnostic Latch Infotmatioti 2 02 desee rere eb eerte Shurdowis tate MUN EM Energize on communication failure 00 eee eee eee De cNer Ze LOND vasos aen cw estu ewan aud eee ee Wisable Line Testis Steere cua eri ewe NL ue petet bs Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers lessen Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers csse he Chapter 4 1715 Analog Module Overview ese Tae a pe eH 1715 IF16 Analog Input Modules sc 5e tee e 1715 OF8I Analog Output Module sseeesuuus Features Common to All Analog I O Mod les dpa Ceiectenhnt a
306. te configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve the following e Vendor e Product Type e Product Code e Revision e Serial Number e Product Name By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an owner controller and a digital I O module without having to remove the module from the configuration This process lets you temporarily disable communication to a module such as to perform maintenance You can do this in the following ways e You write configuration for an I O module but inhibit the module to prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the owner does not establish a connection and configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited e In your application a controller already owns a module has downloaded configuration to the module and is exchanging data over the connection between the devices In this case you can inhibit the module and the owner controller behaves as if the connection to the module does not exist Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Features Specific to 1715 IB16D Digital Input Modules Digital 1 0
307. te detection and control possibilities Plant facilities frequently have related signals such as start and stop signals In these cases it is important to make sure that failures beyond the fault tolerant capability of the system do not result in either inability to respond safely or in inadvertent operation In some cases this requires that channels be on the same module to make sure that a module failure results in the associated signals failing safe It is often necessary to separate signals across modules Where non redundant configurations are employed it is especially important to make sure that the fail safe action is generated in case of failures within the system Field loop power and its affect on inputs sensors and modules and outputs modules and actuators must be considered For normally energized configurations field loop power loss leads to fail safe reaction Where separate supplies power field signals power separation must be maintained between modules so that isolation is maintained To configure 1715 modules for SIL 2 applications you must enable each 1715 module in your system for SIL 2 operation and set its connection reaction time limit CRTL and module requested packet interval RPI In addition for input modules you must configure safe state input values IMPORTANT See Electronic Keying on page 120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 223 Chapter6 1715 Redundant 1 0 Syst
308. the produced data The receiver of the data uses the check data to verify the integrity of the consumed data IMPORTANT To meet SIL 2 application requirements in a ControlLogix system you must use the 1715 Add On Instructions that are described in Chapter 7 Connection Reaction Time Limit The Connection Reaction Time Limit CRTL setting defines the maximum time that the connection can operate with old data before substituting the configured safe state values If the CRTL expires the receiver requires a SIL 2 Reset before valid data is provided again Foran input module if the CRTL expires before the Add On Instruction detects valid data the value of the affected input assembly transitions to the configured safe state value A SIL 2 reset is required before inputs transition from the safe state to field values Foran output module if the CRTL expires before the 1715 firmware detects that valid output data is received from the Logix controller the output data transitions to the configured safe state values In this case a SIL 2 Reset is required before outputs can be re energized The 1715 AENTR adapter performs the following functions e External communication with the controller via an Ethernet network e Communication with I O modules such as receiving input values sending output values and coordinating diagnostics e Enforcement of the output CRTL on data that is received from a ControlLogix controller For high availability
309. the module outputs take on a user selected state This Fault mode is either a user defined value or Hold Last State Program module Program value When a connection from a controller exists and the controller is not in Run mode the module outputs take on a user selected state This Program a k a Idle mode is either a user defined value or Hold Last State Ramp to run Ramp to program Enables ramping of the output value during Run mode between the current output level and a newly requested output Ramping defines the maximum rate that the output is allowed to transition at based upon the configured rate by the Maximum Ramp Rate Enables ramping to the output value to a user defined program value Ramping defines the maximum rate that the output is allowed to transition based on the configured Maximum Ramp Rate Ramp to fault Enables ramping of the output value to a user defined fault value Ramping defines the maximum rate that the output is allowed to transition at based on the configured Maximum Ramp Rate Maximum Ramp Rate Ramp rate alarm A limit on the rate of change of the output in engineering units per scaling per second The Maximum Ramp Rage applies when any of the Ramp to Run Ramp to Program or Ramp to Fault features are enabled A diagnostic that is triggered when the rate of change of the output is limited by the Maximum Ramp Rate Ramp alarm latch When latching is enabled the Ram
310. the over voltage replace the blown fuse by following these steps The fuse can be changed with the termination assembly still installed You do not have to remove it a Lift the plastic cover that covers the fuses b Use a fuse removal tool to lever the fuse out of the fuse holder and replace the fuse You can use these types of replacement fuses Component Fuse Type Analog Input Termination Assembly Littelfuse No 396 TES 50 mA time lag fuse UL 248 14 125V T Leadfree Digital Input Termination Assembly Littelfuse No 396 TE5 50 mA time lag fuse UL 248 14 125 V T Leadfree Digital Output Termination Assembly Littelfuse Type 451 Omni Blok 10 A 125 V very fast acting fuse Surface mount fuse block 154 010 c Close the plastic cover Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 261 AppendixA Status Indicators 1715 Ada pter The adapter has these status indicators Congr ADAPTER 1715 AENTR Allen Bradley Module Status Redundancy Status Network Status Rack Status Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 at 32096 Indicator Description A Module Status Redundancy Status C Network Status D Rack Status E Ethernet 1 amp 2 F Reset 262 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Table 53 Adapter Status Indicators Indicator Module Status Status Indicators Appendix A Status indicators for the 1715 AENTR adapter are shown in this table
311. tion Chassis Type 1756 410 10 Slot ControlLogix Chassis Slot 0 a 2 In the Controller Properties dialog box set controller configuration information for the open project and when online for the attached controller The tabs that appear are particular to the type of controller you have selected 3 Click OK when you are done configuring each tab for your controller For a complete description of each tab and the appropriate configuration settings refer to http www rockwellautomation com literature and type in the name of your controller under Keyword search Next add a ControlLogix Ethernet communication module to the project to let the ControlLogix chassis communicate with the 1715 Redundant I O System The type of module you add depends on the needs of your system Step 3 Add a 1756 EN2TR Module to the Project 1 In the Logix Designer project right click the 1756 backplane in the I O Configuration folder and choose New Module amp 1 0 Configuration fig 91756 Backplane 1756 fq 0 1756 L61 Redun P New Module h Ki Paste Ctri v Print gt 170 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Chapter 5 The Select Module dialog box appears Select Module E x Description Vendor By Category 1756 CNBR D 1756 ControlNet Bridge Redundant Media Allen Bradley 4 1756 CNBR E 1
312. tional status of a module Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an owner controller and an analog I O module This process can occur in either of these ways e You write configuration for an I O module but inhibit the module to prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the owner does not establish a connection and configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited e In your application a controller already owns a module has downloaded configuration to the module and is exchanging data over the connection between the devices In this case you can inhibit the module and the owner controller behaves as if the connection to the module does not exist IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters the Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs goes to zero 0 during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs goes to zero 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 159 Chapter 4 Scaling 160 Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features These examples are instances where you can need to use module inhibiting e You want to upgrade an analog I O module We recommend that you do the following a Inhibit the module a Perform the upgrade b Uninhibit the mo
313. tions status to the controller and output data from the controller The Add On Instructions perform error rate monitoring on the input data they process to verify that the maximum allowed error rate for SIL 2 has not been exceeded The error rate monitoring is performed automatically requires no user configuration and shuts down a link force Add On Instruction outputs to shutdown states and require a SIL 2 Reset immediately when it is detected The Add On Instructions provide an output CRC_error that indicates if this condition has occurred 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 IF16 Data Packet 3j IE IE Input Data q d 3 r d 1715 IF16 1715 F16 1715 AENTR 1715 AENTR 1715 A2A 1715 A310 1715 IF16 Configuration Tag i T SIL2 Check Data SIL 2 Check Data Using SIL 2 Add On Instructions with 1715 Redundant 1 0 Modules Chapter 7 A SIL 2 Reset can be used to reset this condition The following figures illustrate how the Add On Instructions work with input and output data Figure 65 Diagram of Input Module Add On Instruction KC IF16 Duplex SIL2 Add On Instruction _ 1756 Controller Tags put Data Module Configuration Check Data BY The Add On Reconciled Reconciled Instruction veri
314. tions menu choose RSWho RSLinx Classic Gateway File Edit view Communications Station DDEJOPC amp S Configure Drivers Configure Shortcuts Configure Client Applications 3 Navigate in RSWho to the Ethernet network Not Browsing Workstation USMAYTSDUGGANO2 a Linx Gateways Ethernet cz AB ETH 1 Ethernet Backplane j 1756 A10jA zx AB ETHIP 1 Ethernet Right click the 1715 EtherNet IP module and choose Module Configuration 5 Click the Port Configuration tab Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 129 Chapter2 Installation Instructions The Module Configuration dialog box appears 1715 AENTR x General Port Configuration Network Configuration Type Static C Dynamic C Use DHCP to obtain network configuration Use BOOTP to obtain network configuration IP Address 1 88 4 92 2 33 Network Mask 255 255 282 0 Gateway Address Primary Name lr Server Secondary Name rT Server Domain Name Host Name IV Auto negotiate port speed and duplex Current Port Speed 100 Current Duplex Changes to Port Speed and Duplex require module reset Status Network Interface Configured Cancel Appl Help 6 For Network Configuration Type click Static to assign this configuration to the port a In the IP Address field verify the IP address b In the Network Mask field
315. tive Equipment PPE Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment PPE gt gt amp Allen Bradley ControlFLASH ControlLogix Logix5000 Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation RSLinx Classic RSLogix Stratix 8000 Studio 5000 and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes This manual contains new and updated information Changes throughout this revision are marked by change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph New and Updated This table contains the changes made to this revision Information Topic Page Updated European Hazardous Location Approval information and embedded 35 certificates Added slew tolerance information 97 104 110 113 259 260 Added Electronic Keying approved text 120 Clarification of SIL 2 module reconfiguration 289 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 3 Summary of Changes Notes 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Summary of Changes Table of Contents Preface Redundancy System Overview Installation Instructions Table of Contents Important User Information scien eer beat eee dl etes 2 New and Updated Information ciet est ecu eate qun qi b eb ae 3 Before You Begin eus dede Cou ea todo eO a 13 Required Software si veces c
316. to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence P IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures ARCFLASH HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a motor control center to alert people to potential Arc Flash Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death Wear proper Personal Protec
317. ts If an input channel is not capable of reporting a voltage within a safety accuracy specification of 196 of the full scale measurement range then the module returns safe values to the processor Signals transition to a safe state if the module scan time exceeds the connection reaction time limit CRTL AIL I O modules feature status indicators and can also report faults via application variables All modules provide the following status information e Module presence e Module health and status e Channel health and status e Field faults e An echo of the front panel indicators for each module For more information about status indicators see Status Indicators on page 259 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 219 Chapter 6 220 1715 Redundant 1 0 System in SIL 2 Safety Applications Safety Accuracy The I O input modules determine the channel state and the line fault state by comparing the reported input values with user programmed threshold values For each channel of a module two independent measurements are made The discrepancy between these measurements is monitored to determine if it is within the safety accuracy limit The channel is in fault and the last valid value is held until after the CRTL period if the values are outside these limits e Digital input module 4 e Analog input module 1 After the CRTL period the value changes to 0 When using dual modules that are both repo
318. ts 0 1 and I O modules occupy slots 2 25 Expansion cables can be used to connect base units as shown here Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Figure 22 Example System Layout SSSss LH SSSISSS I SSS S D M mr OQ yO Q O jSsSP o ssssisssss SSSSSS o ssssssss o SSSSSS o Issjssiss ss SS Sls Sj SS SSIS S S SSSSSS SSISS S 9 S FEIEN SSiSSiSSSS SS SIS SS SSSISSS e A SINE SIL SIE N e Run Run e cual me peu Foie H Fees pod H per por H per poe Gerais H poen H Gunde H po
319. ts of the 1715 I O modules cannot be pinpointed AII healthy I O module status indicators showing solid red indicates a blown F2 or F4 fuse The adapter tags indicate each individual I O module tag Mod AFault and ModBFault as shown in Figure 17 Figure 17 Adapter Tags Indicate Faults Name zaje _ EAENTR 171521 AB 1715_A08_Duplex 0 eee AENTR_1715 2 1 Fault DINT 280000 0000 0000 000 FRAENIR I71521Ch 2 ase e xri AENTR 71 Ch AB 1 AU ChDuplex AU D 8 AENTR7I5 21Mod4Faut BODL O ooo o o AENTRI715 21ModBFaut BOL FAENTRI7IS2IGouFak BOL HAENTR_1715 2 l ModAGroupFaut Boot AENTR 1715 2 1 ModBGroupF ault BOOL AENTR_1715 2 0 AB 1715_A08 0 0 EE AENTR 1715 2 0 Ch AB 1715 AO Simplex Struc D 0 8 GE AENTR 1715 4 AB 1715_DI_Diagi6 C 0 CI AENTR 171541 AB 1715_DI16_Diag Duplexl 0 amp E AENTR 1715 4 1 Fault DINT AEN R D A oL OL FE AENTR 1715 4 1 PtFault INT 280000 0000 0000 0000 ra u c o ems c o Es ao o Lem 0 0 0 0 IMPORTANT After any fuse replacement or power related issue on PWR 1 PWR 2 the Reset button on the 1715 AENTR must be pressed to clear the fault and reset the status indicator back to solid green Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 1715 A310 1 0 Base Unit The I O base unit holds up to three I O modules 32
320. turer Device Type The general type of the product for example digital 1 0 module Product Code The specific type of the product The Product Code maps to a catalog number Major Revision Anumber that represents the functional capabilities of a device Minor Revision A number that represents behavior changes in the device The following Electronic Keying options are available Keying Option Compatible Module Description Lets the installed device accept the key of the device that is defined in the project when the installed device can emulate the defined device With Compatible Module you can typically replace a device with another device that has the following characteristics Same catalog number Same or higher Major Revision e Minor Revision as follows Ifthe Major Revision is the same the Minor Revision must be the same or higher Ifthe Major Revision is higher the Minor Revision can be any number Disable Keying Indicates that the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a device With Disable Keying communication can occur with a device other than the type specified in the project ATTENTION Be extremely cautious when using Disable Keying if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss We strongly recommend that you do not use Disable Keying If you use Disable Keying you must take
321. tus Offline Cancel Arey Table 33 Fault Program Action Parameters Parameters Description Point Click the point number to configure parameters for the specified point 0 7 Output State During This value Indicates the following controller tag settings Program mode On ProgMode 0 ProgValue 1 Off ProgMode 0 ProgValue 0 Hold ProgMode 1 ProgValue The value previously set Fault mode On FaultMode 0 FaultValue 1 Off FaultMode 0 FaultValue 0 Hold FaultMode 1 FaultValue The value previously set Communication Failure If Communication Fail in Program Mode Specify the action to take when communication fail in Program mode Choose one of the following Leave outputs in Program mode state When selected lets you maintain outputs in the Program mode state default When cleared changes outputs to the Fault mode state Leave outputs in Program mode state appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode Change outputs to Fault mode state When selected lets you change outputs to the Fault mode state When cleared changes outputs to the Program mode state Change outputs to Fault mode state appears dimmed only when in Hard Run mode 12 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 197 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Step 2 Add a 1715 OB8DE Digital Output Module in Simplex Mode Add a 1715 IB16D Digital Input module in Sim
322. ublication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 57 Chapter2 Installation Instructions Digital Output Termination Assemblies Digital output termination assemblies support these features e Provide connections for eight output channels e Industry standard field device connectors e 24V DC operation e Provide a fused field voltage supply to the module There are two types of digital output termination assemblies e A 1715 TASOBSDE digital output 24V DC 8 channel simplex TA that provides termination for 8 digital output channels and mates with one 1715 OB8DE digital output module e A 1715 TADOBSDE digital output 24V DC 8 channel duplex TA that provides fault tolerant operation for 8 digital output channels and mates with redundant 1715 OB8DE digital output modules Figure 19 1715 TASOB8DE and 1715 TADOB8DE Digital Output Termination Assemblies 1715 TASOB8DE 1715 TADOB8DE Digital Output Simplex Digital Output Duplex Termination Assembly Termination Assembly Field Connections Entry This Side Field Connections This Side Y EE z FREE EEE CHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH6 CH7 EE ER ee GNE ee NR inm nmm TB1 TB3 TB4 TB2 __ T EL 10 A Fuse LESE Polarization Pins 9 32093 MTA 32121M Fuse type Littelfuse Type 451 Omni Block 10 A 125V very fast acting fuse Surface Mount Fuse Block 154 010 for Digital Oupt
323. ule has at least one established connection either to itself or to an 1 0 module Flashing green No connections The module has an IP address but there are no established connections either to itself or an 1 0 module Flashing red Connection timeout One or more of the connections either to itself or to an 1 0 module has timed out Steady red Duplicate IP The module has detected that its IP address is already in use Flashing green red Self test The module is performing its power on self tests Flashing amber Unlocked Adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 263 AppendixA Status Indicators Table 53 Adapter Status Indicators Indicator State Description Rack Status Steady off No power unlocked The module has no power or it is not locked via the locking screw Steady green Rack operational All modules in the rack are operating without fault Steady red Fault At least one module in the rack has detected a fault Examine the other modules in the rack for their status indicator condition Flashing green red Self test The module is performing its power on self tests Flashing amber Unlocked Adapter is unlocked from a previously locked state Unlabeled Status 1 Steady off No power The module has no power or is not in recovery Located directly below Rack Status used in Recovery mode mod
324. ult INT Radix Binary 1 bit per Channel 0 15 1 if channel has failed on module A ModBPtFault INT Radix Binary 1 bit per Channel 0 15 1 if channel has failed on module B NoLoad SINT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 7 1 indicates no load ShortCircuit SINT Radix Binary 1 bit per point 0 7 1 indicates short circuit 154 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 1715 Analog Module Overview Chapter 4 Using 1715 Analog 1 0 Module Features Topic Page 1715 Analog Module Overview 155 Features Common to All Analog 1 0 Modules 158 Scaling 160 Operating Modes 161 The 1715 analog I O modules mount in a 1715 Redundant I O System and use an I O termination assembly that is mounted in an I O base unit to communicate via redundant 1715 adapters Before you install and use your module you must do the following e Install and ground a user supplied 24V DC power supply e Determine whether you are using your analog I O module in Simplex or Duplex mode e Install the correct termination assembly that is based on your determination for either simplex or duplex operation Each analog I O module is an isolated module that plugs into one position of the I O base unit and a termination assembly that is mounted to the base unit Analog I O modules can be configured in the Logix Designer application as simplex or duplex and then by selecting one of the two available termination as
325. undant l 0 System is operational During replacement of the module there is a one time up to a maximum 500 ms delay to the system 1 0 Modules I O module slots are numbered from 2 25 based on distance from the adapter base unit If duplex I O module pairs are used the two modules of the pair must be in adjacent slots The left lower slot number is considered the slot number and address for the pair Any combination of simplex modules and duplex pairs can be used in one or more connected I O bases units IMPORTANT A partner 1 0 module can be installed or removed while the 1715 Redundant 1 0 System is operational without impact to the rest of the system Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 17 Chapter 1 Redundancy System Overview Module Positioning in the 1715 Redundant 1 0 System There are 26 total slot positions in the system numbered from 0 25 The first two positions always contain the redundant adapter pair in slots 0 and 1 The remaining positions begin numbering at slot 2 and contain the I O modules ending at slot position number 25 Any combination of simplex or duplex I O module pairs can be used in the I O base units See Table 2 for a sample of what a system could look like Expansion cables can be used to connect base units as shown in Figure 1 on page 19 TIP The sample system configuration in Example 1 does not match the system layout that is displayed in Example 2 Example
326. upport you can find technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs You can also visit our Support Center at https rockwellautomation custhelp com for software updates support chats and forums technical information FAQs and to sign up for product notification updates In addition we offer multiple support programs for installation configuration and troubleshooting For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com services online phone Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support overview page or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your
327. us E a Memes 3 3 4 e a we D o ca Channel 15 e 9 gt seseseee fj 00000000 oes eh at at G M PU 4 mm NI OS Q II OS a ISSss SSSP o ssss ss s SSSISS SS SS SS S S sS Sis s Sa Hose e za I xa xs EH zi ui Channel e e Cni Chameios e Channis due e Chnmios Er 8 zz C UN N S gt o e 8 3 H o e e P E E 8 5 oxi xc d Ss
328. ut Termination Assemblies Use a pair of long nosed pliers for fuse removal and replacement See page 102 for detailed wiring instructions 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 Analog Input Termination Assemblies Analog input termination assemblies support these features 16 input channels for a simplex duplex configuration Industry standard field device connections at the terminal blocks Analog input channels with a high reliability 120 Q precision resistor termination per input channel Individually fused channels with over voltage input protection There are two types of analog input termination assemblies A 1715 TASIF16 16 channel simplex TA that provides termination for 16 single ended analog input channels and mates with one 1715 IF16 16 channel analog input module A 1715 TADIF16 16 channel duplex TA that provides termination for 16 isolated analog input channels and mates with up to two 1715 IF16 16 channel analog input modules Figure 20 1715 TASIF16 and 1715 TADIF16 Analog Input Termination Assemblies 1715 TASIF16 Analog Input Simplex Termination Assembly Terminal Block Cable Entry This Side ELT c a Fuse Cover 1715 TADIF16 Analog Input Duplex Termination Assembly Field Connections This Side CHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8CH9 CH10CH11CH12CH13CH14CH15 SS Channel Chan
329. value Unlatch Ramp Rate Click Unlatch Ramp Rate to send a message to the module to unlatch based on Ramp Rate Unlatch Ramp Rate is enabled when online including Hard Run mode and when Latch Rate Alarm is selected Unlatch Low Clamp is dimmed when offline and online including Hard Run mode when Latch Rate Alarm is cleared Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 207 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System Table 37 Limits Parameters for Analog Output Duplex Module Parameters Disable All Alarms Description Check the checkbox to not report Latch Limit and Latch Rate Alarms in the input tag By default Disable All Alarms is enabled and cleared Latch Limit Alarms Check the checkbox if you want the High Clamp and Low Clamp Limit Alarms to be latched until a message resets them or by the use of a latch reset member of the output tag By default Latch Limit Alarms is enabled and cleared Latch Rate Alarm Check the checkbox if you want the Rate Alarm to be latched until it is reset either by a message or by use of a latch reset member of the output tag By default Latch Rate Alarm is dimmed and cleared IMPORTANT Changing engineering scale values does not automatically adjust the Alarms Limits It is your responsibility to verify re adjust the alarm and limit values 11 Click the Fault Program Action tab The Fault Program Action tab appears E Module Properties AENTR 12 1715 OF8I 2 1
330. ves commands from the adapter and converts the channel input data into secure digital data packets Signal power and isolation circuits separate out each input channel from the rest of the system and protect the system components from field faults The internal isolated power supply from the 24V DC dual redundant system power inputs produces module power The isolated power supply provides power to the module and is protected by over voltage and undervoltage detection circuits Supply voltage monitoring initiates a warning signal and Power off Protection mode when a power failure is detected Internal diagnostics test the module every application cycle to see whether values are within the 1 value fault band and if appropriate report a fault Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 Installation Instructions Chapter 2 An independent watchdog arrangement also monitors the module operation and provides more fault containment by activating a shutdown mechanism ifa fault is detected IMPORTANT Ifa fault occurs during normal operation in a duplex configured system an input module can be removed and replaced without disrupting the flow of input data The adapter also monitors the input data paths and can detect faults within each input channel A visual indication of the module status and individual channel status is provided by an array of front panel indicators The range of termination assemblies can accept one or
331. y module has not been replaced L within the Mean Time to Restoration MTTR assumed for the system in the Probability of Failure on Demand PFD calculations 8 Has the application program been configured to monitor the discrepancy alarms and alert operators when a L discrepancy alarm occurs um 9 Is the safety accuracy adequate for the application l 10 Have variables been configured to report the safety accuracy value for each channel l 11 Have variables been configured to report safe values when the safety accuracy value of a channel fails because it l is reported to be below the 1 accuracy figure 12 Has the maximum duration for single channel operation of an 1 0 module been specified in accordance with the l application requirements 13 Have you used two 1715 AENTR adapters in SIL 2 simplex and duplex configurations l 14 Have you set the Shutdown mode option for each output channel to OFF l 15 If digital output channels have been configured for Hold Last State has the impact on the safety functions been l addressed 16 Have you used the SIL 2 Add On Instructions in accordance with the information in this manual L 17 Have you performed all appropriate proof tests C L Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 307 AppendixE SIL2 Applications Checklist Checklist for 1715 1 0 Modules No For Energize to action SIL 2 Applications Fulfilled Comment Yes No 1 If there
332. your computer Available Downloads Product Selected 1715 AENTR series A Product Version 2 001 Firmware Firmware for 1715 AENTR V 2 001 Product Add Ons AOP for 1715 AENTR Ethernet Release Note Rockwell Automation Publication 1715 UM001D EN P September 2015 165 Chapter5 Configure the Redundant 1 0 System EDS Files The 1715 modules contain the EDS files for installation into RSLinx software You can right click the module in RSLinx Classic software and upload the EDS file into RSLinx Classic software without downloading EDS files from the typical download site Follow these steps to upload from RSLinx Classic software 1 Open RSLinx Classic software 2 In the RSWho tree right click the Ethernet adapter and choose Upload EDS file from device iV Autobrowse iW C3E_DYN1 Ethernet j Zs Cell3MT Ethernet es Cube Ethernet Backplane m Cube2 Ethernet 1715 A11 10 88 61 229 1756 EN2T 1756 EN2T C Backplane 1756 A10 A 00 1756 L63 LOGIX5563 Cube West 01 1756 EN2TR 1756 EN2TR A z A Ethernet 192 168 1 100 1756 EN2TR 1756 EN2TR A 192 168 1 102 1734 AENTR EtherNet IP Adapter i Backplane PointIO Chassis 6 Slot i gy Pointbus Port DeviceNet ed 192 168 1 103 1794 AENT FLEX I O Ethernet Adapter 1794 AENT B 192 168 1 104 1734 AENT EtherNet IP Adapter 1734 AENT Ethernet IP Adapter 5 192 168 1 105 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A E3 Backplane 1756 A4 A 00 1756 EWEBJA

1715-UM001 - Rockwell Automation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents